2017 Jeep Renegade User&#39

2017 Jeep Renegade User&#39
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
17BU-926-AA
Renegade
Fourth Edition Rev 1
User Guide
Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2 01 7 RE N EG A D E U S E R G U I D E
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1-877-426-5337
(U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result
in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in a collision and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends
that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off
the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous
and could lead to a serious collision.
Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can
purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help you
get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
However, it is not a substitute for your
Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover of your user guide and
other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide
may apply to your vehicle. For
additional information on accessories
to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Your new FCA US LLC vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under
some driving conditions. These are to assist
the driver and are never a substitute for
attentive driving. They can never take the
driver's place. Always drive carefully.
Your new vehicle has many features for the
comfort and convenience of you and your
passengers. Some of these should not be
used when driving because they take your
eyes from the road or your attention from
driving. Never text while driving, or more than
momentarily take your eyes off the road.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to
make changes in design and specifications
and/or make additions to or improvements to
its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further
details. For your convenience, the information contained on this site may also be
printed and saved for future reference.
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
1
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured that
it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that on vehicles with steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
2
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is anyway
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
VEHICLE CHANGES/
ALTERATIONS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the
vehicle might seriously affect its safety and
road holding, thus causing accidents, in
which the occupants could even be fatally
injured.
3
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
6
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . .8
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
7
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
8
4 — Hand Grip
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Steering Wheel
7 — Multifunction Lever
8 — Headlight Switch
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
4 — Climate Controls
2 — Radio
3 — Switch Panel
5 — Seats
6 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/
Manual Options)
7 — Selec-Terrain Mode Knob — If
Equipped
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key Fob With Remote Control . . . . . . .13
Manual Front Seats . . . . . . . .
Power Adjustment (Front) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats — If Equipped . .
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
. . . . . .24
. . . . . .24
. . . . . .26
. . . . . .26
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .28
Front Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Rear Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .29
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . .30
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . .30
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . .30
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
MIRRORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped . . . . .22
Child Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . .31
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .31
EXTERIOR LIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . .32
Headlights . . . .
Daytime Running
Equipped . . . . .
High Beams . . .
Flash-To-Pass . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Lights (DRL) —
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. .
If
. .
. .
. .
. . .32
. . .32
. . .32
. . .32
Automatic Lighting — If Equipped . . . .33
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . .34
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Cargo Area Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .35
Front Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . .36
Rear Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .37
CLIMATE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . .39
Manual Climate Controls Overview . . . . .39
Automatic Climate Control Overview. . . .44
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .53
Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .54
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Removing And Installing Panels . . . . .
Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped
Emergency Open/Close. . . . . . . . . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.55
.59
.61
.61
LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
MY SKY SUN ROOF . . . . . . . . . . .54
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . .64
Removable Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Power My Sky — If Equipped. . . . . . . .54
To Open The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
To Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . .65
12
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
KEYS
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Key Fobs
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/
STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key
fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Key Fob With Remote Control
The key fob with Remote Control contains a
Remote Keyless Entry feature. The Remote
Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key
fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Unlock
Lock
Remote Start
Panic
Emergency Key
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, otherwise
the doors will stay locked.
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Request For Additional Key Fobs
General Information
IGNITION SWITCH
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
The push button ignition has three operating
positions. The three positions are OFF, ON,
and RUN.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
14
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
RUN
WARNING!
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is
located inside the cargo area and the liftgate
is opened.
WARNING!
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• No electrical devices are available.
ON
• The vehicle is not running.
• Some electrical devices are available
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition in
the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine," in "Starting And Operating."
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Push the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP
button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
16
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone, refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
manual
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for
further information.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting
To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside
With the doors closed, insert the key blade
into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and
turn to the right to lock the driver's door.
To unlock the driver’s door, insert the key
blade into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the left to unlock the driver's
door.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock button
on each door trim panel forward. To unlock
the doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until
the lock symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is
shut, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure
the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual door separately.
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle
doors before you drive as well as when
you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle. Always make sure the ignition is in “OFF” mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal
injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition in
the ON or RUN mode. A child could
18
WARNING!
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of
the front door trim panels. Use this switch to
lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel
door.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked
with the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
system if equipped. Refer to “Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors” of
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system
and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive
Entry Door Handle, and no door is opened
within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped, the security alarm will
arm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected
by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting
the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handles, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
20
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
NOTE:
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive
Entry vehicle:
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive
Entry door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, and it does not find any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key
fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of
the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either Passive Entry door handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
NOTE:
• The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will
lock the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate
unlock feature is built into the Electronic
Liftgate release.
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in the instrument cluster display,
if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock
when you push the Electronic Release. If
"Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic unlock/
lock button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Touch Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the key fob battery is low or dead, the
emergency key can be used to unlock the
driver side door lock cylinder.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of electronic
liftgate release.
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To release the emergency key, proceed as
follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to
the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key
fob with Remote Control housing.
NOTE:
The Emergency Key can be inserted into the
door lock cylinder from either direction.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be
severely injured or killed. Children
should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could start the vehicle, operate
22
WARNING!
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat buildup may cause them to be
severely injured or killed
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that
prevents the use of the internal door handles
of the vehicle and the power door lock switch.
This device prevents the doors from opening
within the passenger compartment.
Arming The Dead Lock Device
• The device works on all doors and requires
two presses of the lock button on the key
fob.
• The arming of the device is indicated by
three flashes of the direction indicators.
• The device does not operate if one or more
doors are not properly closed.
Disarming The Device
• The device will automatically disarm by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
• Placing the ignition in the ON or RUN
position.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the lock/unlock dial to the
unlocked position, roll down the window,
and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the
door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
can only be opened from the outside when
the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats
WARNING!
ment of the seat could cause you to lose
control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you
could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the
recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. The sudden move-
24
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjusting bar is located at the front of the
seats, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,
lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to
the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the
outboard side of the seat, close to the floor.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down,
forward/rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set
the angle of the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward
on the front of the seat switch. The front of
the seat cushion will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback
switch forward or rearward, the seat will move
in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
could result in loss of control which
could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle
is parked. Serious injury or death could
result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you
could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may
cause damage to the seat controls. Seat
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push
the switch upward or downward to raise or
lower the lumbar support.
NOTE:
Power seat adjustments are only allowed
when the ignition device is turned to ON, and
for about 30 minutes after it is turned to OFF.
The seats can also be moved after opening/
closing the doors for about 30 minutes, locking or unlocking the doors, or switching on of
the front courtesy lights.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located on the
instrument panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Push the heated seat button
turn the HI setting on.
once to
• Push the heated seat button
time to turn the LO setting on.
a second
a third
• Push the heated seat button
time to turn the heating elements off.
26
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 145 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will
change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s
heated seat will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
WARNING!
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Seats
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat
which increases the storage of the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may
be necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Be sure that the front
seats are fully upright and positioned forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must
secure the rear armrest in up position.
• You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area
allows you to carry a single passenger on the
right side of the rear seat, while the enlargement of the right side allows you to carry two
passengers.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Release Lever
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer
to “Removable Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area
Features” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/
for
further information.
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
Rear Seat
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side
of the seat and rest them on the seat belt
guide.
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the
left or right rear seatback completely
forward.
Cargo Area Enlargement
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back
until they lock on both the latches. Verify
the red notches are no longer visible on
the release lever. If the red notches are
visible, the seatback is not secure.
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides
additional storage in the rear cargo area.
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40
Proceed as follows:
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the
rear armrest tab to release it from the seat
and pull forward.
2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side
of the seat.
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as rear armrest with cupholders.
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold
both sides of the rear seatbacks completely forward.
WARNING!
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents
the seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt
guides on the top edge of the seat to
ensure the seatbacks properly latch.
28
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard
head restraints and one center head restraint
for its rear passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the
center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be in the raised position. When
there are no occupants in the center seat, the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum
visibility for the driver.
Adjustment Button Locations
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the
tilt/telescoping lever downward (toward the
floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull
the tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Tilt Steering Wheel Lever
30
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel switch
has been turned
on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting
off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel
can shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm. The heated
steering wheel control button is located on
the center of the instrument panel below the
radio screen.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
left of the button will illuminate to indicate
when the dimming feature is activated. The
sensor to the right of the button does not
illuminate.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the lever under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while the lever under the mirror is set in the
day position (toward the windshield).
Rearview Mirror Adjustment
NOTE:
The mirror will automatically release in the
event of heavy contact with a passenger.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can
turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
Dimming Mirror
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE.
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime running
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the
instrument cluster and interior lighting.
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located
on the instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn
on when the engine is started and remain on
unless the headlights are turned on or the
engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal
operation and resume operation when the
turn signal operation has ended.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push
the turn signal lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) and an indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the high
beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle).
Headlight Switch
32
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams
to activate.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the
headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic Lighting — If Equipped
Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the automatic headlights are enabled,
the headlight time delay is active. After the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
headlights will automatically turn off after
the time is set by Uconnect Settings.
The timing of the headlights is adjustable
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
— If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared
LED, located on the windshield. It detects
changes in light intensity outside the vehicle,
based on the sensitivity of light set by using
the menu on the display or on the Uconnect
system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the
amount of external light required for controlling the lighting.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of view
will cause headlights to remain on longer
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and
other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Parking Lights
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch to the first detent (parking position) to
turn on the parking lights. The parking light
indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights
are still on. Then, turn off the headlights
within two minutes. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off from
the “Lowbeam” position.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position
and headlights were on before the ignition is
OFF, the delay interval begins automatically.
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay Disable
The feature is disabled by turning on the
headlights, the parking lights or by placing
the ignition in the RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is
turned on, they will turn off in the normal
manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two
minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the fog light button on the headlight
switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push
the fog light button on the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
34
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog
lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibility at night while turning the vehicle.
When activated, a light incorporated in the
front fog light will illuminate on the side of
the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or
the turn signal indicator is on. It can be
activated through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in
the
Owner’s
Manual
on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and
a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the
vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights Dimmer Switch
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward
or downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, lower
instrument panel lights, door map pocket
lights, and cubby bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on,
rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward or downward to increase or decrease
the brightness of the instrument panel. The
instrument panel dimmer has two position at
the top of the thumb wheel. The first detent
position puts the interior lighting into daytime mode and at the very top detent position
will illuminate all the interior lights. At the
bottom detent position of the of the instrument panel dimmer, the internal backlights
to their lowest dimmable setting and disable
the interior lights.
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
Front Lights
The lights come on by opening any of the
doors.
The courtesy lights are mounted between the
sun visors above the rear view mirror. The
light switches are used to turn the lights on or
off.
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
the interior lights are turned off. This will
prevent the battery from discharging once
the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be
turned off after approximately 15 minutes
after the ignition is in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof,
there are two interior lights located above the
grab handles of the rear doors.
Cargo Area Lights
Two interior lights are located in the cargo
area on the side trim panels.
These lights automatically turn on/off when
the liftgate is opened and closed, regardless
of the position of the ignition.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end
of the lever.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and
the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Wiper Operation
Mist
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of
the two detent positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low wiper operation
and the fourth for high wiper operation.
Use this feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer Operation
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pulled while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
36
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful
for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of
the two detent positions for intermittent settings, to activate this feature.
NOTE:
If the end of the multifunction lever rotates
from off to the first intermittent setting or
from the first intermittent setting to the second intermittent setting, the wipers will perform a round up to clean the windshield.
This function can be activated or deactivated
by the Uconnect Settings through the radio.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in the “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive.
Place the wiper switch in the off position
when not using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
When the user switches the ignition to OFF,
leaving the lever in intermittent positions, no
wipe cycle is performed for safety reasons.
This temporary inhibition avoids accidental
activations of the wiping (e.g during the hand
washing of the windscreen, blocking the
blades in ice/snow conditions). The user can
activate the Rain Sensing Wipers in three
ways:
• Moving the level in off position and then in
Intermittent positions.
• One MIST command actuation.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h)
and the rain sensor detects the presence of
rain.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the
Owner’s
Manual
at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the
lever.
NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round up to clean the rear window.
ing the rear wiper in an intermittent position
will cause the front and rear wipers to sync
up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the
rear wipers to also stop.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the
off position, the wiper will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released, the pump will
resume normal operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation. If the front wiper is set to
Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as well as
“Enabled” through Uconnect settings), plac-
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located
with the Climate Controls on the instrument
panel. Push this button to turn on the rear
window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately
20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster
off, push the button a second time.
38
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Manual Climate Controls
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise to the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when required.
40
Icon
Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial counterclockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating the Temperature Control all the way counterclockwise results in turning on the
MAX A/C feature.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed
increases as you move the control clockwise from the “0” (OFF) position.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. The center
instrument panel outlets can be adjusted so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow
to the rear.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Floor Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
42
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost
button to turn the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the
rear defrost indicator light on the instrument
panel turning on. The function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to
activate the defrosting of door mirrors and
heated rear window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not
affix stickers or other objects to the inside
of the rear glass.
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button
so that the LED is on, to enter recirculation
mode. It is recommended to turn the internal
air recirculation on while standing in traffic or
in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted air.
Do not use the function for a long period of
time, particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle, to prevent the windows
from misting up.
NOTE:
Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
reach the required heating or cooling conditions quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the
windows misting.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer before the summer.
NOTE:
The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant)
which does not pollute the environment in
the event of accidental leakage. Under no
circumstances is the use of R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must
be turned on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)
44
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower
speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the
AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. The Sync indicator will illuminate when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger temperature setting while in Sync mode will automatically exit this feature and return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones.
Recirculation Button
Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This indicates
that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and
automatic modes.
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is on. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change to manual mode. The blower
speed increases to full (all LEDs on) when MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor is turned on
(LED on), both driver and passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost mode is selected (LED on), rear defroster is turned on (LED on) and the air recirculation is turned off (LED off). If the MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the
climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after
20 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired temperature
shown in the Temperature Display. The set temperature is shown on the display. Turning the control knob completely in
one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display,
respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
NOTE:
Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
Blower Control Knob
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower will cause
the automatic mode to change to manual operation. The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob.
46
Icon
Windshield Mode
Description
Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window demisting. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing both the Panel Mode button and the Floor Mode button, activating them both. Air
comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Mix Mode
Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both the Windshield Mode button and the Floor Mode button, activating them both.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Climate Control Power Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set desired temperature shown
in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully counterclockwise for maximum A/C (LO). The set temperature is shown on the
display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO
(maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the temperature
knob to the desired temperature.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
48
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/
deactivate the compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor
has been turned off, even after the engine
has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE
(AUTO LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of compressor, push the AUTO
button again.
NOTE:
With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a
temperature lower than the outside temperature. Under certain environmental conditions, windows could fog rapidly since the air
is not dehumidified.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance.
Rotate the driver temperature control adjust
knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both
driver and passenger temperature displays
will show MAX A/C LO.
In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode
position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED
on) the windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the
following operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor
when environmental conditions are suitable.
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side
window diffusers.
• Activates the heated rear window defrost.
• Activates the
equipped).
heated
windshield
(if
• Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED illuminated).
When the function is activated, the AUTO
button LED turns off. With the function activated, the only possible manual adjustments
are pushing the A/C control button, adjusting
the fan speed and turning the heated rear
window off.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are pushed, the Climate Control system
will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF)
function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only
windshield distribution activates the Climate
Control system compressor and the air recirculation is set to outside air intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
the windows. Max-defrost is also available in
manual mode.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost
button to turn the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the
rear defrost indicator light on the instrument
panel turning on. The function is automati-
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
cally deactivated after 20 minutes. If
equipped, push the rear defrost button to
activate the defrosting of door mirrors and
heated rear window.
CAUTION!
• A/C
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster heating filaments do not
affix stickers or other objects to the inside
of the rear glass.
Turning Off The Climate Control System
With the Climate Control system off:
• Max Defrost
• The A/C compressor is off.
• The blower is off.
can
be
NOTE:
The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant)
which does not pollute the environment in
the event of accidental leakage. Under no
circumstances is the use of R-134a (refrigerant) allowed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
• Blower Increase
Automatic Operation
• AUTO
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC
panel and the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with
two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow.
System Maintenance
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger compartment from the outside.
50
• Recirculation
To restart the Climate Control system in fully
automatic mode, push the AUTO button.
Push the ON/OFF button.
• The heated rear window
activated/deactivated.
NOTE:
The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was turned off
and restores them when one of the following
knobs/buttons is pushed:
In Winter, the Climate Control system must
be turned on at least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealership before the summer.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the
driver, and passenger temperatures. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Summer Operation
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
52
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window switch is located on the
driver’s door panel. The driver’s power window
switch controls the operation of all the windows.
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ON or RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition is
cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
“Owner’s Manual” on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
1 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)
2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear
Window (If Equipped)
3 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front
Window
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
WARNING!
dren, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up on the switch briefly.
53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window
manually.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to
open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully
open.
WARNING!
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
There is no auto-reverse protection when
the window is almost closed. To avoid
personal injury be sure to clear your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
54
Wind Buffeting
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
MY SKY SUN ROOF
Removable Roof
The roof consists of front and rear panels that
can be removed independently.
On some vehicles the front panel can be
power operated. Refer to “Power My Sky” in
this section.
CAUTION!
The panels are able to withstand the snow.
However, it is recommended that you remove excessive layers of snow that have
accumulated or damage to the panels may
occur.
Power My Sky — If Equipped
Open/Close The Front Panel
The power My Sky switches are located on the
overhead console. The switches are used to
open and close the front panel.
To retract the front panel to the open position,
push the open/close button.
From the fully open position, pull the open/
close switch: the front panel will close completely.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the front panel push and release the
vent switch.
Auto-Reverse Feature
Removing Panels
The front panel of the retractable roof is
equipped with a auto-reverse safety system
that is able to detect the presence of an
obstacle during the opening and closing motion of the panel.
1. Front panel must be in the closed position
to remove panels.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops
and reverses immediately.
During the vent operation any push on the
open/close switch will stop the closing of the
panel.
NOTE:
With both panels removed the retractable
roof cannot be opened or closed.
NOTE:
If the My Sky is in open position, the vent
switch must be held until the panel vents.
Removing And Installing Panels
NOTE:
• Remove the panels only when the vehicle is
stationary.
My Sky Key Location
• The rear panel can be removed only when
the front panel is completely closed or
removed.
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Locate the My Sky Key inside the panel
storage bag in the cargo area.
3. From inside of the passenger compartment, insert the My Sky Key into the latch
key hole.
Latch Key Hole
Unlocking Panel Handle
Rotating My Sky Key
56
4. Rotate and keep the key turned to the
symbol to release the lock.
5. Pull the panel handle down and away from
the stowed position, unlocking the panel.
Removing Key
6. Remove the key from the latch key hole.
Push Panel Up
Removing Front Panel
7. Push panel up and away from latch to
create a small gap.
8. Remove the panel from the outside of the
vehicle.
9. Place the panel inside of the provided bag
for storage in the cargo area. Repeat the
process for the rear panel.
NOTE:
An air deflector is available on the Jeep
accessory line. This deflector may be used to
avoid the “wind buffeting” inside the vehicle,
if the front panel is removed.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Panel
NOTE:
Rear panel must be installed before the front
panel.
2. Gently slide the front panel forward, or the
rear panel backwards.
Closing Panel Handle
Front Guide Tabs
Installing Rear Panel
1. From outside the vehicle, place the panel
on the slides.
58
3. Align the colored guide tabs to ensure the
panel(s) close properly. Front panel is
labeled with yellow guide tabs. Rear panel
is labeled with blue guide tabs.
4. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle
down and toward the stowed position,
locking it into place.
Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped
For proper housing, proceed as follows:
Push To Lock Panel
5. Make sure that the panel has been properly refitted. From inside the passenger
compartment, push upward on the panel
from the bottom, in order to verify that it is
properly latched to the clamping locks.
Roof Panel Bag
After the panels have been removed, store the
roof panels inside of the bag located inside
the storage compartment.
Panel Dividers
1. Open the Roof Panel Bag and lift the
panel dividers toward the outside.
NOTE:
It is recommended to do this procedure outside of the vehicle.
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
First Panel In Storage Bag
Second Panel In Storage Bag
Tie-Down Straps
2. Place the front panel into the bag and fold
the panel dividers down.
3. Place the rear panel into the bag on top of
dividers.
5. Open the Velcro straps provided on the
bag. Anchor them firmly at the tie-down
hooks located in the cargo area.
4. Close the bag and place it on the inside
the cargo area.
NOTE:
• Do not load objects that weigh over
165 pounds (75 kg) on top of the Roof
Panel Bag.
• The bag is washable. Refer to the documentation that is supplied with the bag.
60
Emergency Open/Close
Wind Buffeting
If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retractable roof can be operated manually as follows:
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
1. Remove the protective cap located on the
inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that
is supplied in the tool bag in the cargo
area.
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the
key hole and turn it clockwise to open the
roof or counter-clockwise to close.
CAUTION!
• When refitting panels, be careful to
avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of
clothing from getting caught under the
panels themselves.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of
snow or ice. There is risk of damage.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and
push the safety latch release lever toward
the passenger side of the vehicle. The
hood release lever is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the
hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is
locked into position.
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Close The Hood
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the
other hand, remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the
hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive ve-
62
CAUTION!
hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or
activate the power door lock switches located
on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the Electronic Liftgate release.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Passive Entry Liftgate Handle Location
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located
under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the
yellow tab.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab
slot to trigger the release tab of the
liftgate.
Closing
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate reaches self closing position.
This position allows you to make the load
floor flat for ease of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This position also
makes it possible to use the space below as
another compartment for storing fragile or
smaller objects.
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate
may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Load Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that
can be adjusted as needed.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger
seat is folded flat, it will allow for loading
objects of long dimensions. It is recommended to use this position only during the
actual transporting of the objects, then bring
the load floor in position 1.
Table Tilt Load
The load floor provides securing of any cargo
inside this position, so that the cargo will
slide in the case of sudden braking.
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as follows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
2. Place the desired objects inside the
compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position with respect to cargo area.
In addition to the two positions described
above, the load floor can also be placed in a
tilted position (slanted toward the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the underlying
zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to
pick up the spare tire or the Tire Service Kit).
Displacement Load Floor
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the
supports 1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo
area.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side
panel guides and on the rear cross
member.
To position the load from the lower to the
upper position, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the
load floor.
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and
container carrier, proceed as follows:
• This power outlet is located in front of the
gear selector.
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove
the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure
loads when the vehicle is moving.
The side panels may be equipped with three
grocery hooks (one on the left side and two on
the right side) for securing loads that are not
excessively heavy.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlet
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets
in this vehicle, one located under the HVAC
controls and one located in the drivers side
rear cargo area. These power outlets can
power mobile phones, electronics and other
low power devices.
64
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Front Power Outlet
• This power outlet is located in the drivers
side rear cargo area.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Body Computer Fuses
F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel
Power Outlet.
Engine Compartment Fuses
F18 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Cargo Power
Outlet.
Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
• To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in
the device. The outlet automatically turns
off when the device is unplugged.
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug
it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
66
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . .68
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.69
Instrument Cluster Display Controls . . . .69
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
TRIP COMPUTER. . . . . . . . . . . . .70
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Red Telltale Lights . .
Yellow Telltale Lights .
Green Telltale Lights .
Blue Telltale Lights . .
White Telltale Lights .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.71
.74
.78
.79
.79
Gray Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .80
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
68
Tachometer
Temperature Gauge
Instrument Cluster Display
Fuel Gauge
Speedometer
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on
the left side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings.
• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menus and submenus
(Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist,
Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages,
Screen Set Up).
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through
Menus And Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access
Information/Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information
• Push the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up).
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the back/left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
•
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
• Stop & Start – If
Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
NOTE:
Refer to your Owner's Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
70
TRIP COMPUTER
Average Consumption
The Trip computer is used to display information on car operation when the key is turned
to the RUN position.
• Represents the average fuel consumption
since the start of the new trip.
This function allows you to define two separate trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where
the car's "complete trips" are monitored in an
independent manner.
• Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new
trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the
OK button on the steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the
figures relating to:
• Distance Travelled
Travel Time
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various
parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities
and begin a new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
• Average Consumption
• "Manual" by pushing the OK button.
• Travel Time (driving time)
Distance Travelled
• "Automatic" when the "distance" reaches
the value is 62140 (99999.9 km) or when
the "time travel" reaches the value of
999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).
• Indicates the distance travelled by the start
of the new trip.
• After each disconnection and reconnection
of the battery.
Quantities Displayed
WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
Red Telltale Lights
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication.
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the
bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check
or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either
not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the STOP/OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then
turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
72
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Pressure Fail Warning Light
This light indicates that the oil pressure sensor has failed. Do not operate the vehicle
until the cause is corrected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates vehicle oil temperature
is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “JumpStarting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. As engine coolant temperatures
rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
— Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light
This warning light indicates that there is a
fault in your vehicle’s Electric Power Steering
system.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Hood Open Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
• If the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
• See your authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is left open and not fully closed.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display
and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.
Contact your authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Light — If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is
73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the vehicle under power, your vehicle
will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service
is required and you may experience reduced
performance, and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Yellow Telltale Lights
— Automatic Headlight Fail
This light illuminates when there is a failure
of the automatic headlights. If this light illuminates, have it inspected at an authorized
dealer.
74
— Rain Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when the rain sensor
fails. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go
out when the engine is running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be
ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
This telltale indicates that an ESC event is
active.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
— Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your
authorized dealership.
— Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
— Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an accident
has occurred, and the system has shut the
fuel off.
— Forward Collision Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
— Forward Collision OFF Warning
(FCW) Light
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.3 — 1.8 gal (5 — 7 L) this light will turn
on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the
system senses the lane has been approached
and is in a lane departure situation.
This warning light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
— If Equipped
— LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
This light will turn on when the LaneSense
system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
— Keyless System Failure
This light illuminates when there is a keyless
system failure. If this light illuminates, take it
to an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap
is loose. Properly close the filler cap to dis-
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
engage the light. If the light does not turn off,
please see your authorized dealer.
— Malfunction Warning Light
The vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position
before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not
come on when placing the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after vehicle start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this
occurs.
76
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
— Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in
sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
— Audio System Failure Light — If
Equipped
The telltale illuminates to report a failure of
the Audio System.
Contact your authorized dealership as soon as
possible.
77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
— Side Distance Warning — If
Equipped
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
This light indicates a side distance warning.
— Towing Hook Breakdown Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
— Transmission Temperature Indicator
Light
This light indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or
faster until the light turns off.
78
telltale is no longer displayed. Refer to
“Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
Green Telltale Lights
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an
attempt was made to break into the vehicle.
— Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition
is turned to the RUN position. It’s duration
may be longer based on colder operating
conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until
— Automatic High Beam Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Speed Control
is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
— Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up when
the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch
has been pushed.
— Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Turn Signal Warning Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as
selected, as well as the exterior turn signal
lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/
Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Blue Telltale Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction
control lever away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low
beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
White Telltale Lights
— Cruise Control ON Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON, but not set.
— Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light
sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have
an authorized dealer inspect it.
— Set Speed Warning Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along with
pop up message of speed warning exceeded.
When the set speed is exceeded by 3 km/h or
more, the indication will light up yellow and
flash along with a continuous chime (up to
ten seconds or until the speed is no longer
exceeded). ”
The number “120” is only an example of a
speed that can be set.
Gray Telltale Lights
— Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control
has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are
79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
80
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
dead battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated
test, which you can use prior to going to the
test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will
have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of
two things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If
your vehicle was recently serviced or had a
battery failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as
you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above
test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you
should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
81
82
SAFETY
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .84
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .100
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . .84
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . .85
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .93
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .106
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . .106
Seat Belt Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .113
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped. . . .96
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . .135
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . .138
83
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
• Brake pedal pulsations.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
84
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
WARNING!
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver
accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will
continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system
will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
85
SAFETY
• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The
system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
86
WARNING!
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. The system may reduce engine power
and apply the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once
an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
WARNING!
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
WARNING!
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems,
follow the instruction below.
There are three modes of active safety systems present on the vehicle:
• ESC On
• Partial Off
• Full Off
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC
when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It
is also the normal mode for operating a fourwheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH
87
SAFETY
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once
the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the
power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted
out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be
used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
information.
NOTE:
It is recommended to select the mode "Partial
Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons.
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving
in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode
raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
what ESC normally allows.
88
WARNING!
ESC OFF Button
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” button and the ESC Off
indicator light will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light
will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD
High And 4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for offhighway and off-road use when ESC stability
features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The “ESC Off”
button is located in the lower switch bank
above the climate control panel. To enter
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” button for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an “ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off
(except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until the vehicle
reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system
automatically switches to “Partial Off” mode,
described above. When the vehicle speed
returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the
ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode.
The ESC OFF indicator light is always illumi-
nated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” button. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE:
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
NOTE:
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for
ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system
will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is
started in 4WD LOW range or the power
transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW
range.
• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a
chime will sound when the gear selector is
moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message
was cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the
activation of some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some active safety systems in order to optimize performance in
specific modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems
will be indicated by a light in the instrument
cluster.
In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems are partially disabled and put in place to
ensure maximum performance in the specific
mode of operation. However, you can reactivate them completely at any time by pushing
the ESC button.
NOTE:
In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are
completely bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-road performance.
89
SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The
“ESC
Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC
Activation/Malfunction
Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles/
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC
Activation/Malfunction
Indicator
Light” also flashes when Traction Control
System is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
90
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be ON even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light"
indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is partially off or
full off.
The ESC OFF switch is located in the center
console.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors,
such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions, and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to
the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS system,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial
Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the
ESC system with the electric power steering
to increase the safety level of the whole car.
In critical situations (understeering, oversteering, braking with different grip conditions), through the DST function the ESC
system controls the steering to implement an
additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver
to the driver. The coordinated action of
brakes and steering increases the safety and
car control feeling.
NOTE:
The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the
car.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving
while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
91
SAFETY
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
Driver Override:
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Deactivating HDC
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an LED which offer
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is
in.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• Driver’s door is closed.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately
8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch when enable conditions have not been met.
Activating HDC
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude (greater than approximately 8%).
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the
driver and can be adjusted using brake and
throttle input.
Disabling HDC
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right
position.
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• Driver’s door opens.
92
WARNING!
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive
WARNING!
to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at
the outside mirror and extends approximately
20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when
the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is
necessary to deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to avoid a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the radar sensors located on the rear
fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects
in the detection zones by illuminating the
BSM warning light located in the outside
mirrors in addition to sounding an audible
(chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than
31 mph (50 km/h).
93
SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a
relative speed less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects
that are traveling in the opposite direction of
the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only
an aid to help detect objects in the blind
spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
94
WARNING!
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly
and cautiously out of the parking space until
the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are
moving toward the side of the vehicle with a
minimum speed of approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either
side. If the sensors are blocked by other
structures or vehicles, the system will not be
able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming
vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even
when using RCP. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. When-
ever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be a related message on instrument cluster
display. If BSM system is off, this message
will be visualized every time the vehicle is
restarted.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
NOTE:
The rear bumper must be clean and free of
any obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporary
unavailable:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
In the case of the system being completely
unavailable:
• A chime will turn on.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
95
SAFETY
NOTE:
Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized dealer for service.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use this
equipment.
96
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
• FCW monitors the information from the
forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate
the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning.
• If the driver does not take action based
upon these progressive warnings, then the
system will provide a limited level of active
braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After
the end of the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could stall, unless the driver
can depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After
the end of the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission may remain in last gear
stored: therefore the vehicle could lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds
later. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is
4 mph (7 km/h).
• The maximum speed for FCW activation is
124 mph (200 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal
FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the
FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
• If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
• The active braking is enabled only if the
front seat belts are fastened.
• The active braking is disabled when a trailer
is connected with a Mopar Trailer Towing
system. If the vehicle is equipped with an
aftermarket system, it is recommended that
the Active Braking is turned off manually.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
Turning FCW On And Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located
in the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Warning +
Active Braking,” this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you and enable the active
braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the system, so no warning or active
braking will be available in case of a possible collision
• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support
if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only
possible with the vehicle at a complete stop.
97
SAFETY
NOTE:
The FCW system state is not kept in memory
from one ignition position to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will turn on when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the
Uconnect system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by choosing one of the
following three options: "Near", "Medium" or
"Far".
The default option is "Medium". This setting
provides that the system notify the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is at a standard distance,
intermediate between the other two possible
settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to
"Far", the system will warn the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle in front
when the latter is at a greater distance, giving
you the chance to act on the brakes in a more
limited and gradual. This setting gives the
driver the maximum possible time of reaction
to prevent a possible accident.
98
By changing the option to "Near", the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is
a reduced distance. This setting offers a
reaction time to the driver lower than the
settings "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a
potential accident, while a more dynamic
driving of the vehicle.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is
maintained in memory when the engine is
switched off.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
• FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system
fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice.
In these cases, the instrument cluster display
will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas
(i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The system will recover after the ve-
hicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
In certain driving conditions, such as:
If weather conditions are not a factor, the
driver should examine the sensor. It may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
The sensor is located behind the lower grille.
In absence of visible obstructions on the
bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the
radar directly on the surface, after having the
radar cover removed. It’s recommended that
your authorized dealer perform this operation.
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the
lane
The system is not able to detect the presence
of vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but
placed outside the field of action of the radar
sensor and could therefore not react in the
presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
NOTE:
• If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille
is not recommended. Doing so may block
the sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming
intersection
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular attention, while
maintaining control of the vehicle to drive in
complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system
could detect the presence of a vehicle that is
in front of the vehicle, but that does not
preside in the same lane. In cases such as
this, the system might respond.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while
standing in the traffic lane of their vehicle
and inside the field of action of the radar
sensor may cause the intervention of the
system.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that crossed the range of the radar
sensor, in an oncoming intersection.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
99
SAFETY
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use this
equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
100
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute
to a poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
CAUTION!
wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
TPMS information on your instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
101
SAFETY
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn off.
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message
will be displayed and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as
102
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn off when the fault condition
no longer exists. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to
XX" messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size spare, the TPMS will
update automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
the instrument cluster will display a "Tire
Low" message for a minimum of five seconds
and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition,
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
103
SAFETY
the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update,
the pressure values in the graphic display in
the instrument cluster will return to their
original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
104
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and
tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the
TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of
a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a Tire Low message, an "Inflate to
XX" message and a graphic showing the
low tire pressure value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the tire pressure value in
the same color as the other pressure values in place of the different color low tire
pressure value. The instrument cluster
will also display a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service
the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value and an "Inflate
to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
105
SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
106
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a
vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints
or belt-positioning booster seats. Older
children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Initial Indication
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while
the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
107
SAFETY
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
108
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a
crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
109
SAFETY
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
110
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
111
SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
112
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
113
SAFETY
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
114
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START
or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
115
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
116
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of
side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side
of the front seats. The SABs are marked
with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label
sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact
by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side im-
117
SAFETY
pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam
on the outboard side of the seatback’s
trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area
where the SAB inflates. Children are at
an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
118
The SABICs deploy downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the trim out of
the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head
or other injuries to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
WARNING!
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are
designed to activate in certain side impacts
and certain rollover events. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular side impact or rollover event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts
119
SAFETY
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only.
priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appro-
120
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater — If
Equipped.
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is
active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left
and right turn signal lights, located in the
instrument panel, may both be blinking and
will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
• Unlock the power door locks.
121
SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
(Turn Signal Must be
placed in Neutral
State).
Right turn light
2. Turn ignition MAR/
BLINKS.
ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON
3. Turn right turn
SOLID.
signal switch ON.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is
4. Place turn signal
OFF.
in neutral state.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light
5. Turn left turn sig- BLINKS.
nal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
122
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
Right turn light
6. Place turn signal
BLINKS.
in neutral state.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON
7. Turn right turn
SOLID.
signal switch ON.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is
8. Place turn signal
OFF.
in neutral state.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is ON
9. Turn left turn sig- SOLID.
nal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn
signal switch OFF.
Right turn light is
(Turn Signal Switch
OFF.
Must be placed in
Left turn light is OFF.
Neutral State).
11. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
12. Turn ignition
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
(Entire sequence
System is now reset
needs to be comand the engine may
pleted within one
be started.
minute or sequence
will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed
within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights
will blink and the reset procedure must be
performed again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion,
WARNING!
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
123
SAFETY
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
124
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm
call: 1–888–327–4236
to
or
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
who have not reached the height or weight limRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
its of their child restraint
the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivehave out-grown the height or weight limit of
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
their rear-facing child restraint
of the vehicle
Children who have out-grown their forwardBelt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
facing child restraint, but are too small to propseat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
125
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
126
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Re- Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
straint
Rear-Facing Child ReMore than 65 lbs
straint
(29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lbs
Restraint
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Only
+ Top Tether Anchor
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
127
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
128
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
combined weight of the child and the child
weight of the child restraint) for using the
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
restraint?
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearCan the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint?
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posiUse the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
No
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorage?
child seat in the center seating position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
Can two child restraints be attached using a
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorNo
common lower LATCH anchorage?
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacYes
back of the front passenger seat?
turer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints may be removed in every
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
rear seating position.
129
SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
130
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
Tether Anchors
Lower Anchors
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
• Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCHCompatible Child Restraint” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
131
SAFETY
WARNING!
attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
132
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
Always use the tether anchor when using the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child reWeight limit of the Child Restraint
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
straint, up to the recommended weight limit of
forward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
the child restraint is allowed, if the child reback of the front passenger seat?
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraintscan be removed in each
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posiseat belt against the belt path of the child reNo
tion with an ALR retractor.
straint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-
tion to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
133
SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat step 5.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rearfacing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
134
WARNING!
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Transporting Pets
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Passengers
NOTE:
Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
135
SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running, adjust
your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
136
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats
that leave the pedal area unobstructed and
that are firmly secured so that they cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
your floor
• ALWAYS securely attach
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
137
SAFETY
WARNING!
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
138
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other
fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .140
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Changing LaneSense Status. . . . . . . .161
Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Activation . . . . . . . . . .
Setting A Desired Speed .
Varying The Speed . . . .
Accelerating For Passing .
Resume Speed. . . . . . .
Deactivation . . . . . . . .
.154
.154
.154
.155
.155
.155
REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . .161
REAR PARKSENSE . . . . . . . . . . .155
ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Rear ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . .
Enabling And Disabling Rear
ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service The Rear ParkSense System. .
ParkSense System Usage Precautions.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . .141
Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
SafeHold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Brake Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . .143
MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . .144
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Gear Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Limp Home Mode . .
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.148
.149
.152
.153
. . .153
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.155
.156
.157
.157
LANESENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . .159
LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . .159
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE . . . . . . . . .163
Four Wheel Drive (4x4). . . . . . . . . . .163
SELEC-TERRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Mode Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . .164
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .167
RECREATIONAL TOWING. . . . . .167
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . .168
139
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Manual Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put
the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
position.
WARNING!
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without
pressing the accelerator.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
140
4. If the engine does not start, place the
ignition in the OFF mode and wait 1015 seconds before attempting to restart
the engine.
4. If the engine does not start, place the
ignition in the OFF mode and wait 1015 seconds before attempting to restart
the engine.
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the ignition or push the START/
STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the
RUN position.
Proceed as follows:
Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from
the RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power
supply to the accessories are maintained for a
period of three minutes.
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put
the gear selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition
in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds
the driver to place the ignition to OFF.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accelerator.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
window switches remains active for three
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
function.
Automatic Transmission
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow
the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting off the engine.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
(EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric
Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater
convenience. The EPB switch is located in
the center console.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in RUN. Then put your
foot on the brake pedal and push the park
brake switch down momentarily. Once the
park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp and the switch indicator will
extinguish.
The park brake can also be automatically
released. With the engine running and the
transmission in gear, release the brake pedal
and depress the throttle pedal. For safety
reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened.
NOTE:
• You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages or disengages.
Park Brake Switch
• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
are engaging or disengaging the parking
brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement.
• The new Auto Park Brake feature can be
used to apply the park brake automatically
every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park
Brake can be enabled and disabled in the
Settings menu in Uconnect or in “Safe
Hold” conditions.
• The parking brake can be engaged even
when the ignition is OFF, however, it can
only be disengaged when the ignition is in
the RUN mode.
• Safehold is a new feature that will automatically apply the park brake under certain conditions. The EPB monitors the status of the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door
and pedal positions to determine if the
driver may have exited while the vehicle is
still capable of moving and will then automatically apply the park brake to prevent
the vehicle from rolling.
• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the
EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
141
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Refer to “Electric Park Brake (EPB)” in
“Starting And Operating” located in the
vehicle’s
Owner's
Manual
at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further details.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
142
WARNING!
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll
and cause damage or injury. Also be
certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can
be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to
the release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some
cases, with an automatic transmission, if at
the cycle of key from RUN to the OFF mode
the gear selector is not firmly locked in Parking position, EPB applies automatically even
if Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the
ignition is in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
mode and back to RUN again.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
Brake Service Mode
• The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
We recommend having your brakes serviced
by your authorized dealer. You should only
make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door
is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push
the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With
the electric park brake system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
The actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The EPB switch not activated.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is in
the RUN mode.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
143
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle, especially on
an incline.
144
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to
the floor and put the gear selector to the
desired position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the lever).
REVERSE Ring
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and simultaneously move the
lever to the left and then forward.
Shifting
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy and performance, it
should be upshifted as listed in the recom-
mended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
All Engines
Gear Selection
Accel.
Cruise
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable
when the transmission is warm. This noise is
normal and is not an indication of a problem
with your clutch or transmission.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
34 (55)
19 (31)
27 (43)
Downshifting
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
WARNING!
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
is recommended to preserve brakes when
driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into
lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can
damage the engine and clutch systems,
Any attempt to shift into lower gear with
clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into
145
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
lower gear and releasing the clutch may
result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful
to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can
cause engine damage, and/or clutch
damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with
clutch pedal depressed could result in
clutch damage.
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
6 to 5
80 (129)
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
5 to 4
4 to 3
70 (113)
50 (81)
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,
these conditions may cause the engine to
overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage
to the clutch and the transmission can
result from skipping a gear while down-
shifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is
held pressed (i.e., not released).
146
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine to overspeed and/or damage
the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
3 to 2
30 (48)
2 to 1
15 (24)
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the
art, fuel efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster display. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or
forward. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System" in this section). Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always
apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
WARNING!
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
147
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
148
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick
(+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward) it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector Lock Button
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet the needs of FCA current and
future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software
and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very
specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage
before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on
an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) by locking the transmission. The
engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may
shift the transmission into PARK first, and
then apply the EPB.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake
WARNING!
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK
if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally (or stopped) and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
149
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running
or the propulsion system is active. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the park
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
150
WARNING!
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that
the gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also
press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range, as this can damage the
drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly
move the gear selector all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range.
Apply the electric park brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn
off the ignition to coast down a hill. These
are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
tend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and ex-
If the transmission becomes extremely hot,
the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission
may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position), it can
be moved forward and rearward. This allows
the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the
gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
151
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first or second gear (depending on
model) when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or
second gear. Starting out in second gear
can be helpful in snow or icy conditions.
Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not
occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick
is engaged because the transmission will
not shift automatically.
152
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift
in or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until
the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
5. Restart the engine.
Transmission function is electronically monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition
is detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission
remains in fourth gear regardless of which
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
Ignition Park Interlock
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go:
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is
locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be in the RUN mode (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before
pushing the button on the gear selector to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
Speed Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
SET+/Accel
RES/Resume
On/Off
SET-/Decel
CANC/Cancel
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
153
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
WARNING!
• In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed
to shut down if multiple Speed Control
functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
• The Speed Control function will not work in
4WD Low Range.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will
turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go
154
faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Varying The Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the Uconnect system if equipped.
The speed increment shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the Uconnect system if equipped.
The speed increment shown is dependant on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
Accelerating For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition to OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
REAR PARKSENSE
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Rear ParkSense will retain the last system
state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to
the RUN position.
Rear ParkSense can be active only when the
gear selector is in REVERSE.
Rear ParkSense Sensors
The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
155
STARTING AND OPERATING
Chime
Detection Distances
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in
the case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an
acoustic signal that varies with the distance
of the obstacle from the bumper is activated.
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is
taken into account only what is the shorter
distance.
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
• Increases with the distance between vehicle and object decreases.
• Becomes continuous when the distance
that separates the vehicle from the obstacle
is less than approximately 12 inches
(30 cm), while terminates immediately if
the distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between
vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If
this situation occurs for the side sensors,
the signal is stopped after approximately
three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates in case of maneuver along a wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the
volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on,
is automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense.
156
Instrument Cluster Display
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only if you have selected the
item "Beep and Display" inside the "Settings"
menu of the Uconnect system.
In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle when the display shows only a flashing
arc and the chime becomes continuous.
The color on the display depends on the
distance and location of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc
in the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle
and the sound tone will change from slow, to
fast, to continuous.
When the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show a message such as
“PARKSENSE DISABLED” for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or
right rear region, the display will show a
single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear
region and will produce a fast sound tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and the tone will change from
fast to continuous.
The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on
when Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires
service. The Rear ParkSense switch LED will
be off when the system is enabled. If the Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires
service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be
on.
Rear ParkSense will remember the previous
state when the vehicle is switch off.
CAUTION!
After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear
ParkSense remains in this setting until the
next ignition cycle, even in the case of
changing the setting of starting RUN to
OFF and then again in RUN.
Service The Rear ParkSense System
During vehicle start up, when the Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will show a message such as
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in your Owner’s
Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show a message such as
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for for approximately five seconds. Under this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if
the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind
the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper while driving
the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
157
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
158
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch
and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor
field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
The default status of LaneSense is off.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
To turn the LaneSense
system on, push the
LaneSense
button
(LED turns off). A
“Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
159
STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time, torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
the left thin line turn solid white. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
160
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied
to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Changing LaneSense Status
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
screen.
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The camera is located above
the rear license plate.
• When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control
system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of your vehicle's rear
surroundings when the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a note
to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
Parking Camera
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
161
STARTING AND OPERATING
A touchscreen button to disable the camera
is available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE or if touchscreen button “X” at the
top of the camera screen is pressed. Display
of the camera image after shifting out of
REVERSE can be disabled via Uconnect Settings.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based
on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are
162
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up Camera.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive
Low (4WD Low)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic
in normal driving mode.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
with no driver inputs or additional driving
skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the
traction. If the front wheels begin to lose
traction, power is shifted automatically to the
rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and
type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be
used. Unequal tire size may cause failure
of the power transfer unit.
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Selec-Terrain Switch
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
163
STARTING AND OPERATING
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
Models Only)
Enabling 4WD LOW
SELEC-TERRAIN
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in
RUN mode or with the engine running, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and push
the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument
cluster will display the message "4WD LOW"
once the shift is complete.
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
NOTE:
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
Mode Selection Guide
• The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD Low" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD Low, please follow the steps below:
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission
shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW
button once.
Selec-Terrain Switch
164
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather.
It's used on and off road and on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered
with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the
transmission will use second gear (rather
than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low
(Trailhawk models only).
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic
and can be used on and off road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverability and acceleration improvement compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This
mode also reduces fuel consumption, since
it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as sandy
bottoms. The transmission is set to provide
maximum traction. This mode allows more
wheel spin and higher shift points to help
motor through loose areas.
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device
sets the vehicle to maximize traction and
allow the highest steering capacity for offroad surfaces. This mode gives you the
maximum performance off-road. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Trailhawk package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”
in “Safety” located in the Owner’s Manual
at www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for
further information.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper
placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it
opens and closes automatically upon
insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that
it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of
fuel.
165
STARTING AND OPERATING
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on
the indentation point indicated by the arrow.
• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then
close the door.
• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and
close the door.
Emergency Refueling Procedure
• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
cargo area.
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
• Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill funnel located in the cargo
area.
• Open the fuel door.
• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
Fuel Filler Door
• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and
proceed with filling the fuel tank.
• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least
10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside
of the tank.
166
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
WARNING!
• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end
of the filler neck other than is provided
on the car.
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply
with the vehicle and may cause pressure
increases inside the tank, creating dangerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank
with open flames or lit cigarettes its an
extreme fire hazard. Also, avoid close
contact with the filler pipe with your
face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the
vicinity of the pump fuel nozzle, it can
be a possible risk of fire.
TRAILER TOWING
1.4L Turbo Engine
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
Trailer towing is not recommended.
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain.
Engine
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.4L
2,000 lbs (900 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
WHEELS OFF THE GROUND
NONE
REAR
FRONT
ALL
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
167
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place
the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine
OFF.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
• Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
• Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do
not start the engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake
pedal.
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the
front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels
off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four
wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
168
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle
requires towing, make sure the drive
wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on
the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a
flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .170
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . .170
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Body Computer Fuse Center. . . . . . . .175
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .177
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
Preparations For Jacking . . . . .
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . .
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.177
.178
.179
.181
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions.
Replacing The Sealant . . . . . . . .
. . .182
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .188
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .188
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .190
. . .182
. . .183
. . .184
Front Wheel Drive (FWD). . . . . . . . . .191
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . .191
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped. .191
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .185
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Preparations For Jump Start. . . . . . . .185
Jump Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . .186
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .192
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .187
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .187
169
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in OFF mode.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Front Courtesy Light
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof)
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof)
Interior Lights
Dome Light (Glove Compartment)
170
Bulb Number
C5W
C5W
C5W
C5W
W5W
W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
Bi-Xenon HID Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL )
Front Direction Indicator Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Reverse
License Plate Lamp
FUSES
Bulb Number
(Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
H13
P21/5W
PY21W
H11
WY5W
P21W
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
W16W
W5W
WARNING!
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking sys-
WARNING!
tem), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
171
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Refer to your Owner's Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further fuse information
Engine Compartment Fuse Location
172
Cavity
F01
F02
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Micro Fuse
–
–
F03
–
20 Amp Blue
–
F04
–
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear
Distribution Units
Controller Power Supply Body
Computer
Brake Control Electronics
Module
Cavity
F05
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
–
F06
F07
–
–
–
–
F08
F09
F10
F11
20 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Orange – 1.4 Without
A/C
50 Amp Red – 1.4 With A/C
And All 2.4 Models
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
F14
F14
F15
F16
–
–
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4 Engines
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
–
5 Amp Tan
F17
–
–
F18
–
–
10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines
15 Amp Blue – 2.4 Engines
20 Amp Yellow
F19
F20
–
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
Description
Electric Power-Assisted Steering
Engine Cooling fan
Engine Cooling fan
Automatic Transmission, GSM
Control Module Engine
Horn
Supply Secondary Loads
Heater "Blow By"
Pump Power "After Run"
Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power,
Automatic Transmission
Supply Primary Loads
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition
Powered
Air Conditioner Compressor
Electronic Power Four-Wheel
Drive
173
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
174
Cavity
F21
F22
F23
Maxi Fuse
–
–
–
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
F24
–
–
15 Amp Blue
F30
–
–
F83
F84
F87
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
20 Amp Yellow (Customer Installed)
–
30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
F88
F89
F90
–
–
–
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
Description
Fuel Pump
Power Control Module Engine
Heated Windshield – If
Equipped
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery Powered
Air Conditioning Fan
Power Supply All Wheel Drive
Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
Heated Outside Mirrors
Heated Rear Window
IBS Sensor (Battery State Of
Charge)
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the
steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see your authorized
dealer.
Cavity
F31
F33
F34
F36
Mini Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
F37
10 Amp Red
F38
F42
F43
F47
F48
F49
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
F50
F51
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
F53
F94
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
Description
Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
Power Window Front (Driver Side)
Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, Alarm, Power Folding Outside Mirrors, USB Port
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD),
IPC
Central Locking
Power Under Lock and Key
Bi-directional Pump Washer
Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome, Mirror, Electric Motor Retractable Roof, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, ESL
Supply Air Bag
Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light, Air Conditioning Compressor, Brake
Pedal Switch (NC), Plaque Automatic Transmission, Compass, Rear
Camera, Leveling Headlights, Air Conditioning
Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go
Power Socket
175
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse
holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of
the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if
equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle.
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Mini Fuse
30 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
F8
20 Amp Yellow
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse
for the sun visor of the retractable roof.
176
Description
Power Inverter
HIFI Audio System
MY SKY
Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)
Power Seat (Driver Side)
Power Seat (Driver Side And Passenger Side)
Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats (Driver Side
And Passenger Side)
Heating Front Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity
F1
F5
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F6
15 Amp Blue
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
Description
Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers
Side)
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger
Side)
WARNING!
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack And Tools Location
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment if equipped, inside a
special container.
177
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right
front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Jack And Tools
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire.
4. Remove the chocks.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the spare tire.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the Electric Park Brake.
178
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an
automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
WARNING!
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel
bolt wrench.
179
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. If equipped with wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel
bolt wrench to pry the center cap off
carefully before raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking location is indicated by a
stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.
WARNING!
Front Jacking Location
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
180
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a
compact spare tire or a limited — use
spare tire. Refer to “Tires — General
Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for
further information.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice. The correct torque specification
for the wheel bolts is 89 Ft-Lbs
(120 Nm). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer
or at a service station.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks,
and flat tire.
181
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. The
correct torque specification for the wheel
bolts is 89 Ft-Lbs (120 Nm). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools
back in the proper storage location. Release the Electric Park Brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
182
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear
storage compartment inside a storage container. Located inside the container are a
screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel.
To access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the load floor.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Warning Label
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit
located in the rear storage compartment inside the storage container.
off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive
the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can
be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
conditions. Do not remove the foreign object
from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and
repeat the inflation process.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out from the bag and place it
near the punctured tire. Screw the clear
flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle
power outlet socket. Start the vehicle
engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to
the “I” position. The electric compressor
will be turned on, sealant and air will
inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure
should be reached within 20 minutes. If
the pressure has not been reached turn
When the correct pressure has been
reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the
tire pressure. If the pressure is below
19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle,
as the tire is too damaged, contact the
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service
Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or
above repeat the inflation process to
reach the correct tire pressure and continue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle
and place it on the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has been
treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger
183
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
WARNING!
of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving with extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always
stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are seri-
ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of
Tire Service Kit to come in contact with
hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit
sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.
Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if
there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction
or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and
drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
184
Replacing The Sealant
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the
expiration date at your authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
WARNING!
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special
compartment, away from sources of heat.
Failure to follow this WARNING may result
in sealant canister rupture and serious
injury or death.
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can
be jump-started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
front of the engine compartment, behind the
left headlight assembly.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post.
185
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
186
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding Fuel” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• On the highways — slow down.
187
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel
and boot assembly from the center
console.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
188
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
WARNING!
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
6. Move the Gear Selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access hole (at the right front corner of the
gear selector assembly), and push and
hold the override release lever down.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand
or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around the front wheels.
For vehicles with automatic transmission,
push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to
restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/ SECOND gear and
189
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
190
FWD MODELS
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE:
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the
ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is
unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in
this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being
towed.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all
four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable
methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be
used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
there will be one in the rear and two mounted
on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will
be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
Place the ignition in the RUN and subsequently on ON, without opening the door.
During towing remember that not having the
aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power steering, greater force is
needed in applying the brakes and steering of
the vehicle.
191
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
192
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . .194
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . .204
Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .204
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .199
RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .206
1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .203
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped.203
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . .204
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tires — General Information . .
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tires — If Equipped . . .
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . .
Tire Chains (Traction Devices). .
Tire Rotation Recommendations
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.206
.214
.218
.219
.220
.222
.222
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . .224
STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .224
BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . .225
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . .226
Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . .227
Leather Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
193
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in
the instrument cluster. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change.
194
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir,
and fill as needed.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
one year or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Maintenance Plan
Severe Duty All Models
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the
following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
150,000
14
15
Or Kilometers:
240,000
140,000
13
224,000
130,000
12
208,000
120,000
11
192,000
110,000
10
176,000
100,000
9
160,000
90,000
8
144,000
80,000
7
128,000
70,000
6
112,000
60,000
5
96,000
50,000
4
80,000
40,000
3
64,000
30,000
2
48,000
20,000
1
32,000
10,000
Or Years:
16,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
Check tire condition/wear and adjust
pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service
Kit expiration date (if equipped).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check operation of lighting system
(headlamps, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights,
etc.).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid
levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, battery, engine coolant,
etc.).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check engine control system operation
(via diagnostic tool).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect condition of: exterior
bodywork, underbody protection, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel system brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves,
bushings, etc.).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check windshield/rear window wiper
blade position/wear.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check operation of windshield washer
system and adjust jets if necessary.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
195
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate
locks and cleanliness and lubrication of
linkages.
•
Visually check the condition and wear of
the front and rear brakes.
•
Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV
joints and replace if necessary.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visual inspect the condition of the accessory drive belt.
Check the tension of the accessory drive
belt.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect and replace, if required, front
end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and,
idler pulley.
•
•
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
•
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.*
Inspect the PTU fluid level.
•
•
•
Inspect the rear differential fluid level.
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo engine). **
Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). **
196
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes
first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace engine air filter. #
•
Replace brake fluid every two years. ***
Replace cabin filter.
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi,
police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine).
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
○
•
•
•
•
197
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
# The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty
areas.
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be
carried out when indicated by a warning
light or message on the instrument panel,
or in any case should not exceed 1 year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km).
** The spark plug change is distance based
only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and
type which are specially certified for such
engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information).
198
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the “Maintenance
Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
• Contact your authorized dealer if you have
any questions.
*** The brake fluid change interval is time
based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.4L Turbo Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Battery
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Oil Fill Cap
199
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
200
4 — Battery
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct
level. Check the oil level at regular intervals,
such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately
five minutes after a fully warmed engine is
shut off. Do not check oil level before starting
the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold
will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground, and approximately five minutes after
a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve
the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings
on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated
by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aera-
CAUTION!
WARNING!
tion, which can lead to loss of oil pressure
and an increase in oil temperature. This
loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a
cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan
motor lead before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed
and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser
201
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the
fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes
may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should
be checked when performing under hood
services, or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
202
the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid
level should be checked when the pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the
clutch release system. The two systems are
separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The
manual transmission clutch release system
should not require fluid replacement during
the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid
reservoir is low and the brake system does not
indicate any leaks or other problems, it may
be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch
release system. See your local authorized
dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in the “Technical Specifications” section for
further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair
its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to
WARNING!
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect
overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch
system resulting in loss of clutch function
and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill
plug. The fluid level should be between the
bottom of the fill hole and a point not more
than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
203
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
204
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the
battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Service Position Strategy
Function Deactivation:
The service position allows the wiper blades
to be placed in a position that allows the
wiper blades to be easily changed.
The functionality is reset if:
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
wipers must be in the Park position before
placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
Service mode must be activated within two
minutes after the ignition is placed in the
STOP/OFF position.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will
go into the parking position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the
Service Position command (antipanic) must
be active for at least half a second.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several times to bring the blades into
the desired position, up to a maximum of
three times.
• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN
position.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning
the ignition OFF.
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise
the wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
205
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper
blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap
the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder on the wiper arm.
Tire Markings
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the
wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper
arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until
it snaps into place.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to your authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate
glass.
206
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service
Description
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size
designation.
Example:
215/
65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
208
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If
the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway
use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
209
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
210
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
211
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
212
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
213
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
214
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
216
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck,
and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
217
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer
with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
218
WARNING!
tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa-
tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original
equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in
your
Owner’s
Manual
on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals for further
information.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation
for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
219
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
220
WARNING!
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can
damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, nonacidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
CAUTION!
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
221
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following
traction devices are recommended:
All Models:
• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted
with the use of 215/65R16 and 215/
60R17 tires only. Front tires ONLY.
• Original equipment 215/65R17 (trailhawk
tires), 225/55R18 tire sizes are NOT
chainable.
CAUTION!
• Use on front tires ONLY.
• Damage may result if tire chains or traction devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
222
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further
use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in
the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that
must not be reversed.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance
tire wear.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
223
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not in224
WARNING!
clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for
more than a month, observe the following
precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from
the battery post and be sure that the battery
is fully charged. During storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from
the electrical system, check the battery
charge every thirty days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the
glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on
the tire placard and check it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two weeks or more, idle the engine
for approximately five minutes with the air
conditioning system on and high fan speed.
This will ensure a proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle
is put back into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park
Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a
minute with ignition switch in the OFF
position and close the drivers door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the
drivers door is closed.
BODYWORK
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
225
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in
damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure
that such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of
your vehicle.
• It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
INTERIORS
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
226
Seats And Fabric Parts
WARNING!
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-
tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends
to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric
dye transfer more so than darker colors. The
leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
227
228
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . .230
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .231
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . .233
Chassis Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . .232
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . .234
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .230
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE
ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .232
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . .232
229
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
Chassis Number
The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a
plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel cover, which is visible from
outside the car through the windshield.
Torque Specifications
Wheel Bolt Torque
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This number is also stamped on the floor of
the passenger compartment, near the right
front seat.
230
**Wheel
Bolt Size
Wheel
Bolt
Socket
Size
M12 x 1.25
17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
Torque Pattern
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations
and provide satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87 using the
(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance
and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or
higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline
engines are designed
to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having a octane rating of
87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
231
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent
Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When
available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
232
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L
ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for
Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles
can be identified by a unique fuel filler door
label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Refer to
the
Owner’s
Manual
at
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals/ for more
information.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door
label or a yellow gas cap can operate on
E-85.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S
Fuel (Approximate)
1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified)
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
12.7 Gallons
48 Liters
4.0 Quarts
5.5 Quarts
3.8 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.5 Quarts
5.2 Liters
6.8 Quarts
6.5 Liters
233
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines
234
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as
Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.
235
236
MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . .239
RADIO 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Operation (If Equipped) . .
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Reception Conditions . . . . . .
Care And Maintenance . . . . .
Anti-Theft Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.240
.240
.240
.240
UCONNECT ACCESS . . . . . . . . .241
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available
On Uconnect 6.5 NAV — U.S. Residents
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect
6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States, Alaska
And Hawaii) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing 3G
Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 6.5 NAV, U.S.
48 Contiguous States And Alaska) . . . .243
Using Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . .243
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Built-In Features (Uconnect 6.5 NAV). .245
Uconnect Access Remote Features . . .248
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.252
.252
.252
.253
. . . . .253
UCONNECT 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels .
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.255
.255
.256
.257
.257
.259
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . .260
Introducing Uconnect .
Get Started . . . . . . . .
Basic Voice Commands.
Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.260
.262
.264
.266
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . .271
UCONNECT 6.5 NAV . . . . . . . . .272
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels .
Media Hub – Playing iPod/USB/
MP3 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect 6.5 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . .
.273
.273
.274
.275
.278
.281
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Voice Recognition Quick Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . .
Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) .
Uconnect Access — If Equipped
(6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.285
.287
.288
.290
.292
.293
.295
. . . .296
237
MULTIMEDIA
Register (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) . . . . . . .297
Mobile App (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) . . . . .298
Voice Texting (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) . . . .298
Yelp (Uconnect 6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . .298
SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 6.5 NAV —
US Market Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . .302
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . .304
238
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . .304
UCONNECT PHONE. . . . . . . . . .306
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile
Phone To The Uconnect System . . . . .308
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . . .312
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your
Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/software-update
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual.
239
MULTIMEDIA
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Right Switch
Care And Maintenance
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/CD/SXM/AUX/USB or BTSA
(Bluetooth Streaming Audio) — If
Equipped.
• The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
Left Switch
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station (radio).
Reception Conditions
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
240
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the secret code from being entered
after the power supply has been disconnected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See an authorized dealer for
further information.
UCONNECT ACCESS
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (Available
On Uconnect 6.5 NAV — U.S. Residents
Only)
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist,
will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use
WARNING!
Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect Access enhances your ownership
and driving experience by connecting your
vehicle to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network. When connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network, you
can:
• Place a call to a local 9-1-1 Operator for
emergency assistance.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect Access App from your device.
You can also do so by logging into Mopar
Owner Connect, or by calling Uconnect
Care when your vehicle has an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
• Turn your vehicle into a 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
and connect your devices to the internet.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's theft alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Listen to your text messages or send freeform text messages with your voice while
keeping your hands on the wheel, using the
Voice Texting feature. Requires a device
that supports Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (MAP).
• Search for places to eat, shop, relax and
play with Yelp, using your voice or onscreen menu. Then navigate to them (navigation standard on Uconnect 6.5 NAV).
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your Overhead Console.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect Access.
1. The ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons are located in your Overhead Console. The ASSIST button is used for contacting Road-
241
MULTIMEDIA
side Assistance, Vehicle Care and
Uconnect Care. The 9-1-1 button connects you to emergency services.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT
have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities. 9-1-1
or other emergency line operators in Canada
and Mexico may not answer or respond to
9-1-1 system calls.
2. The Uconnect “Apps” on the radio touchscreen. This is where you can begin your
registration process, manage your Apps
and purchase 3G Wi-Fi on demand.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages hands-free, enter
navigation destinations, and control your
radio and media devices.
242
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the Uconnect Access
Services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with Uconnect Access. After
the trial period, if you wish to continue your
Uconnect Access Services you can choose to
purchase a subscription.
Features And Packages
• After the trial period, you can subscribe to
continue your service by visiting the
Uconnect Store located within the Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
moparownerconnect.com. If you need assistance, U.S. residents can call Uconnect
Care at 1-855-792-4241.
• For the latest information on packages and
pricing information: U.S. residents visit
DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access Registration (Uconnect
6.5 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,
Alaska And Hawaii)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on the overhead
console.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, push the MORE button on the
faceplate then press the Apps button on the
touchscreen and select the Uconnect registration app to “Register By Web” and complete the process using your device or computer.
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you using Yelp.
• Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands
on the wheel!)
For further information,
DriveUconnect.com.
please
visit
Renewing Subscriptions And Purchasing
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot (Uconnect 6.5 NAV,
U.S. 48 Contiguous States And Alaska)
Subscriptions, and 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot, can be
purchased from the Uconnect Store within
your vehicle, and online at Mopar Owner
Connect. If you need help push the ASSIST
button on the rearview mirror, then select
Uconnect Care (or dial 1-855-792-4241 ).
NOTE:
You must set up a Uconnect Access Payment
Account online (log in to
moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile,
then Uconnect Payment Account, to set up
and manage your Payment Account).
Using Uconnect Access
Get started with your Uconnect Access apps
by pushing the MORE button on the faceplate
and then the “Apps” button on the touchscreen. Available apps and features are organized by the tabs on the left of the screen:
• Favorite Apps — This is the default screen
when you first press the “Apps” button on
the touchscreen, and is a good place to put
the apps you use most frequently. To make
an App a “favorite,” press the “favorite”
button on the touchscreen to the right of
the app until the star is illuminated making
the App a favorite.
• All Apps — All of your available Apps will
reside in the “All Apps” folder.
• Running Apps — Press this tab to see which
apps are currently running.
Getting Started With Apps
Applications (Apps for short) in your
Uconnect Access system are designed to deliver the features and services that you want
using the 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network on your Uconnect 6.5 NAV radio.
243
MULTIMEDIA
Favorite Apps
1 — Favorite Apps Tab
244
2 — Favorite Button
Maintaining Your Uconnect Access
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your Uconnect Access Account information from the vehicle. You can
do this on the Mopar Owner Connect website
(moparownerconnect.com). Removing your
account information cancels your subscription and makes your vehicle factory-ready for
a new owner/subscriber.
For additional information on Uconnect:
• U.S. residents - visit DriveUconnect.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
• Canadian Residents - visit
DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Built-In Features (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
WARNING!
WARNING!
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist,
will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use
Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have 9-1-1 Call service if needed. If the rearview mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
9-1-1 system may not send a signal to a
9-1-1 operator if an air bag is deployed.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to
a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder,
etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system
or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
245
MULTIMEDIA
• Uconnect Access Care — In vehicle
support for Uconnect Access System,
Apps and Features.
WARNING!
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps and
services, among others, will not operate.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
1. Assist Call – The overhead console contains an ASSIST push button which (once
registered) automatically connects the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations for immediate
support:
9-1-1 And ASSIST Buttons
1 — 9-1-1 Button
2 — ASSIST Button
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help anytime. Additional fees may apply. Additional information in this section.
246
2. Emergency 9-1-1 Call (If Equipped) — The
overhead console contains a 9-1-1 button
that, when pressed, may place a call from
your vehicle to a local 9-1-1 operator to
request help from local police, fire or
ambulance personnel. If this button is
accidentally pressed, you will have ten
seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press
the 9-1-1 Call button again or press the
“Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen. After ten seconds has passed, the
9-1-1 call will be placed and only the
9-1-1 operator can cancel it. The LED
light on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. The green LED light
will turn off once the 9-1-1 call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer service
the vehicle if the overhead console light is
continuously red. On equipped vehicles,
this feature requires a functioning electrical system and an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection to
function properly. If a connection is made
between a 9-1-1 operator and your vehicle,
you understand and agree that 9-1-1 operators may, like any other 9-1-1 call, record
conversations and sounds in and near your
vehicle upon connection.
share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your
vehicle is equipped with this feature and
has an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network connection, you may be
able to connect with Roadside Assistance
by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the
overhead console. You will be presented
with Assist Care options. Make a selection
by pressing the prompts displayed on the
radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided
to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may incur. In
order to provide Uconnect Services to you,
we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect
Care or Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the
Uconnect Services in your vehicle, your
device or via a landline device, and may
4. Yelp — Customers have the ability to
search for nearby destinations or a point
of interest (POI) either by category or
custom search by using keywords (for example, “Italian restaurant”). Searching
can be done by either voice or by using the
touchscreen keypad. Using the touchscreen, launch Yelp by selecting the
“Apps” icon, press the “All Apps” tab,
and then press “Yelp.” Using voice recognition, push the Voice Command (VR)
button on the steering wheel and say
“Launch Yelp,” then follow the instructions on the Teleprompter.
5. Security Alarm Notification — The Security
Alarm Notification feature notifies you via
email or text (SMS) message when the
vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm
system has been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have
been triggered, one of which could be that
your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see
the details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register,
Security Alarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at the mail
address you provide should the alarm go
off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to your mobile device.
6. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, Uconnect
care can help locate your vehicle. The
Uconnect Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local
law enforcement. Then, using GPS technology and the built-in wireless connection within your vehicle, the Uconnect
Care agent will be able to locate the stolen
vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. Your vehicle must have an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection and must be registered
with Uconnect Access with an active subscription that includes the applicable
feature.
247
MULTIMEDIA
7. 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot — 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an
in-vehicle feature that connects your device to an operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G
(data) network using Uconnect Access
and is ready to go where ever you are.
Once your vehicle is registered for
Uconnect Access, you can purchase a 3G
Wi-fi Hotspot subscription at the
Uconnect Store. After you've made your
purchase, turn on your signal and connect
your passengers devices. It's never been
easier to bring your home or office with
you.
WARNING!
NEVER use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot when
you are driving the vehicle. As the driver,
you should only use the 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot
when the vehicle is parked in a safe location. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle Uconnect
features to operate.
248
Uconnect Access Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect Access App
allows you to remotely lock or unlock your
doors, start your engine or activate your horn
and lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and
your vehicle must have an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection). Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details. You
can download the App from Mopar Owner
Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or
Google Play store. Visit UconnectPhone.com
to determine if your device is compatible. For
Uconnect Phone customer support and to
determine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
Remote Start — This feature provides the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle,
without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your vehicle
in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turnoff an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factoryinstalled Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect
Access App is downloaded, login with
your user name and password.
NOTE:
Your four digit Uconnect Security PIN is
required to confirm the request.
• You can set-up notifications for your
account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command
is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click
on Edit Profile to manage Uconnect
Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door on
your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four
digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your
Uconnect Access App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the
driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar
Owner
Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit
Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a
vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking
area by activating the horn and lights. It may
also help if you need to draw attention to your
vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect Access App from a
compatible smartphone.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the Uconnect Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect Access
App is downloaded, login using your user
name and password. You will need your four
digit Uconnect Security PIN to confirm the
request. You can set-up notifications for your
account to receive an email or text (SMS)
message every time a command is sent. Login
to
Mopar
Owner
Connect
(moparownerconnect.com) and click on Edit
Profile to manage Uconnect Notifications.
Voice Texting — Want to dictate a personal
message? Register with Uconnect Access to
take advantage of a new, cloudbased Voice
Texting service, an enhancement to Voice
Text Reply.
Voice Texting allows you to compose a new
text or reply to an incoming text message.
Before you attempt to use the Voice Texting
feature, check to ensure you have the following:
1. A paired, Bluetooth enabled phone with
the Message Access Profile (MAP). Not all
Bluetooth enabled phones support MAP,
including all iPhones (Apple iOS). Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility information.
2. An active Uconnect Access trial or paid
subscription.
3. Accept the “Allow MAP” profile request
on your smart phone. (Please refer to
device manufacturer instructions for
details).
249
MULTIMEDIA
To Send A Text Message:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone Button
on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the beep.
3. Say “Text.”
4. Uconnect will prompt you “Say the phone
number, or full name and phone type of
the contact you want to send a message
to.”
5. Wait for the beep and say a contact that is
in your phonebook, or a mobile phone
number that you would like to send the
message to.
6. Uconnect will prompt you “Please say the
message that you would like to send.” (If
you do not hear this prompt, you may not
have an active subscription with
Uconnect Access).
7. Wait for the beep, and then dictate any
message up to 140 characters. If you
exceed 140 characters, you will hear the
following prompt: “Message was too long;
your message will be truncated.”
8. Uconnect will then repeat the message
back to you.
9. Uconnect will prompt you: “To add to your
message, say “Continue;” To delete the
current message and start over, say “Start
Over;” to send the current message, say
“Send;” to hear the message again, say
“Repeat.”
10. If you are happy with your message and
would like to send it, wait for the beep
and say “Send.”
11. Uconnect will then say “Sending your
message.”
Sample Commands For Voice Text Reply And Voice Texting
Example Command
“Text John Smith”
“Text 123 456 7890”
“Show messages”
“Listen to/view (message number four, for example)”
“Reply”
“Forward text/message to “John Smith”
“Forward text/message to “123 456 7890”
250
Action
Send a message to specific contact in address book
Send “123 456 7890” a message from your phonebook
See recent text messages listed by number on Uconnect screen
Hear messages or read it on Uconnect screen
Send a voice text reply to a current message
Forward current text to specific contact in address book
Forward current text to specific phone number
RADIO 3.0
Radio 3.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RADIO Button
INFO Button
A-B-C Button
Preset Buttons
BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
SEEK Up Button
BACK Button
8 — Play/Pause — MUTE Button
9 — MENU Button
10 — SEEK Down Button
11 — AUDIO Button
12 — ON/OFF Button — VOLUME Knob
13 — MEDIA Button
251
MULTIMEDIA
Clock Setting
Audio Setting
Store Radio Presets Manually
1. Push the Menu button at the bottom of
the radio, and push the Enter/Browse button for System Settings. Next, select the
Time and Format setting and then select
Set Time by pushing the Enter/Browse
button.
• Push the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
The presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pushing any of the six
preset buttons. The Radio stores up to
18 presets in each of the Radio modes. Push
the A-B-C button on the faceplate to select
the A, B, or C preset list.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the
Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the Enter/
Browse button to move to the next entry.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format
by turning the Tune/Scroll knob, then
pushing the Enter/Browse button on the
desired selection.
3. Once the time is set, press the “Back”
button to exit the time screen.
• The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade, Balance, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness and AUX Offset
• Select the desired setting to adjust, then
push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting +
or - . Push the “Back” button when done.
Radio Operation
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push the up or down button to seek through
radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
252
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Push and hold the desired numbered button for more than two seconds, or until
you hear a confirmation beep.
Disc Operation (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a remote CD player
located in the lower center console storage
bin, or in the lower center bench seat bin.
• CD/Disc Mode is entered by either inserting
a CD/Disc or by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the side of the display. Once in
Media Mode, select “Disc.”
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with
the CD label facing as indicated on the illustration located on the Disc player.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX) Manual
Operation
Audio Jack (AUX)
USB/iPod
• The AUX allows a device such as an
MP3 player or an iPod to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle’s speakers.
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cable into the
USB port or by pushing the MEDIA button
located left of the display.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons, not the buttons
on the radio. The volume may be controlled
using the radio or the device.
To select a specific audio source, push the
MEDIA button on the faceplate and select
from the following modes:
Seek Up/Down Buttons
• Push to seek through CD tracks.
• Hold either button to bypass tracks without
stopping.
253
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 5.0
Uconnect 5.0 Radio Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
254
RADIO Button
Display ON/OFF Control
COMPASS Button
MORE Functions Button
BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
6 — Back Button
7 — Mute Button
8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob
9 — Uconnect PHONE Button
10 — MEDIA Button
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
Audio Setting
Clock Setting
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
To start the clock setting procedure:
2. Press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
2. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen, then press the “Clock and Date”
button.
3. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
4. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, then select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
5. Once the time is set press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
3. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button
on the touchscreen to open the Audio
menu.
4. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the speakers.
Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to
adjust the sound level from the front and rear or
right and left side speakers. Press the Center
“C” button on the touchscreen to reset the
balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select On or Off followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. When this feature is activated, it
provides simulated surround sound mode.
255
MULTIMEDIA
Radio Operation
Radio Operation
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
256
Radio Station Preset
All Presets
Seek Next
Audio Settings
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Station Information
Direct Tune
Radio Band
Seek Previous
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen will display all of the
preset stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds, or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Seek Next/Previous Buttons
• Press the up or down button to seek through
radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
Get every channel available on your satellite
radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard
Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race and
more. And get 20+ Xtra channels, including
SiriusXM Latino, a selection of channels
dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push
the RADIO Button on the faceplate and
then the “SXM” button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide
to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S.
residents and 1-888-539-7474 for Canadian
residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement
for
complete
terms
at
www.siriusxm.com and www.siriusxm.ca for
Canadian residents. All fees and programming
subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older in
the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius
satellite service is also available in PR (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet radio ser-
vice is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2017 Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation
USB Port And Audio Jack (AUX)
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX/Audio Jack
USB/AUX
The USB/AUX Jack is located in the center of
the gear shift zone, below the HVAC controls.
257
MULTIMEDIA
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or an iPod cable into
the USB port or by pushing the MEDIA
button on the faceplate located below the
display. Once in Media Mode, press the
“Source” button on the touchscreen and
select USB/iPod.
NOTE:
The USB source will say "iPod" only when an
apple product is connected to the USB port.
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select USB/iPod to change the
mode to the USB device. If the device is
connected, music from your portable device will play through the vehicle's
speakers.
258
Audio Jack (AUX)
Bluetooth
The AUX jack allows a portable device, such
as an MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
If using a Bluetooth - equipped device, you
may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select AUX to change the mode
to AUX.
• The functions of the portable device are
controlled using the device. However, the
volume may be controlled using the radio or
portable device.
Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select Bluetooth to change the
mode to Bluetooth. If the device is paired,
music from your portable device will play
through the vehicle's speakers.
NOTE:
If changing the name of the device within the
Bluetooth settings of your device (where applicable), and the device is connected to the
vehicle Bluetooth system, the system may
change the current playing track.
Here’s how:
Uconnect 5.0 Available Media Hubs
Uconnect Media
5.0
Hub
(USB,
AUX
Ports)
S
Remote
USB Port
(Fully
Functional)
N/A
Remote
USB Port
(Charging
Only)
S
S = Standard Equipment
N/A = Not Available
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say “reply.”
Uconnect will give the following prompt:
“Please say the message you would like to
send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the
pre-defined messages. (If you are not
sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will
then read the pre-defined messages
allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in trafYes.
See you later.
fic.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
I will be <5,
Where are
Okay.
10, 15, 20,
you?
25, 30, 45,
Are you there
60>* minCall me.
yet?
utes late.
See you in
I’ll call you
I need direc<5, 10, 15,
later.
tions.
20, 25, 30,
I’m on my
45, 60>*
Can’t talk
way.
minutes.
right now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
*Use only the numbering listed or the system
may not transpose the message.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
259
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features
require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP). iPhone and some other smartphones
do not currently support Bluetooth MAP. Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device
compatibility.
Want to dictate a personal message? You
must first register with Uconnect Access
(U.S. residents only) to take advantage of a
new, cloud-based Voice Texting service, an
enhancement to Voice Text Reply.
260
UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.
Key Features:
• Five-inch Color Touchscreen Display with
AM/FM/USB/Bluetooth
• Bluetooth with integrated voice control
Uconnect 5.0
261
MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
262
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pressing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first press either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push For Voice Recognition (VR)
3 — Push To End Call
263
MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
say:
. After the beep,
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
264
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect 5.0 Visual Cues
265
MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
say:
. After the beep,
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system will provide you with a list of commands.
266
Uconnect 5.0
267
MULTIMEDIA
Media
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest
Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
268
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
U.S./Canadian residents can visit
• UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands…
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts
269
MULTIMEDIA
TIP: When providing a Voice Command,
press the Phone button
and say “Call,”
then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
270
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect
are registered trademarks of FCA US LLC.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect
Access
Services
Support
1-855-792-4241.
Please
have
your
Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
271
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 6.5 NAV
Uconnect 6.5NAV Radio Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
272
Display On/Off Control
Settings Button
Back Button
BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
APPS Functions Button
Uconnect PHONE Button
7 — Uconnect Navigation (NAV) Button
8 — MEDIA Button
9 — RADIO Button
10 — On/Off Button — Volume Knob
11 — Mute Button
Clock Setting
Displaying The Time
If the time is not currently displayed on the
radio or player main page press the Settings
button. In the Settings list, press the “Clock”
button on the touchscreen then press “On” or
“Off” for Show Time in Status Bar.
Setting The Time
Uconnect 6.5 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the
time manually, follow the instructions below.
• Turn the unit on, then press the time display at the top of the screen, a pop-up will
ask if you want to set the time. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, push the Settings button. In the
Settings screen, press the “Clock” button
on the touchscreen, then select “ON” for
“Show Time Status.”
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, press
“Off” for Sync with GPS.
• Press “X” to exit out of the Clock Setting
screen.
Audio Setting
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” or back arrow located at
the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “+” or “-” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
“+” and “–” buttons or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume
with variation to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
• Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen. When this feature is activated, it provides simulated surround
sound mode.
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
273
MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Uconnect 6.5NAV
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
274
Radio Station Presets
Toggle Presets
HD Radio Available
Audio Settings
Seek Next
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Direct Tune Radio Stations
Seek Previous
Browse/Manage Presets
Radio Bands
• To access the Radio mode, press the RADIO
button below the screen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button.
Seek Next/Seek Previous
• Press the up or down “Seek Arrow” buttons
on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either Seek Arrow button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds
to bypass stations without stopping. The
radio will stop at the next listenable station
once the Seek Arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
“Arrow” button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
You can also see all presets for a band by
pressing the "Browse" button on the touchscreen. This browse screen lets you delete a
preset and shows the station frequency, name
and genre.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Direct Tune
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 Channels
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the touchscreen, and
entering the desired station number.
Get every channel available on your satellite
radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.
Hear commercial-free music plus sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Get all the
premium programming, including Howard
Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, every
MLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race and
more. And get 20+ Xtra channels, including
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
SiriusXM Latino, a selection of channels
dedicated to Spanish language programming.
• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press
the “SXM” button on the main Radio
screen.
The following describes features that are
available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the “Seek Arrow” buttons on the
touchscreen for less than two seconds to
seek through channels in SXM mode.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channel
once the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing
the “Tune” button on the touchscreen, and
entering the desired station number.
275
MULTIMEDIA
Tune Start
Fav
Tune Start begins playing the current song
from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the twelve presets, so
you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start
works in the background, so you will not even
realize it’s on, except that you will miss the
experience of joining your favorite song with
only a few seconds left to play.
Activates the favorites menu. You can add up
to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press Add
“Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the
song is playing. You will then be alerted any
time one of these songs, or works by these
artists, is playing on other SiriusXM channels.
Traffic & Weather
Automatically tells you when Traffic &
Weather for a favorite city is available, and
gives you the option to switch to that channel.
Browse Sub-Menu
All
Genre
Presets
Favorites
276
on the touchscreen, then select Channel
Skip. Press the box, check-mark, next to
the channel you want skipped. They will not
show up in normal usage.
• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call
(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers,
1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)
and request the Family-Friendly Package.
SiriusXM Parental Controls
• You can skip or hide certain channels from
view if you do not want access to them.
Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen, press the “SiriusXM Setup” button
Browse
Lets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing
or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,
Weather and Jump settings also provide a
way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.
Sub-Menu Description
Shows the channel listing.
Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the selected genre.
Lets you scroll the list of preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or press enter on the tune knob, to
go to that channel. Press the trash can icon to delete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of
the main Satellite Radio screen.
Lets you manage artists and songs in the favorites list and configure Alert Settings to let you know when
favorite songs or artists are playing on other channels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your
Favorites.
Browse Sub-Menu
Game Zone
Jump
Sub-Menu Description
Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which is being aired on other SiriusXM
channels, or when their game score is announced. You can select and manage your teams list here, and
configure alerts.
Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which is used by the jump feature
on the main satellite radio screen.
Replay
Lets you replay up to 44 minutes of the
content of the current SiriusXM channel.
Replay Option
Play/Pause
Rewind/RW
Fast Forward/FW
Replay Time
Live
Option Description
Press to pause content playback. Press pause/play again to resume playback.
Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to rewind continuously, then release to
begin playing content at that point.
Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast Forward/FW can only be used when
content has been previously rewound.
Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your content lags the live channel.
Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewound content.
• SiriusXM services require subscriptions,
sold separately after the 12-month trial
included with the new vehicle purchase. If
you decide to continue your service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at thencurrent rates until you call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and
1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to
cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com for
U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents. All fees and programming
subject to change. Our satellite service is
available only to those at least 18 and older
in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our
Sirius satellite service is also available in
PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our
satellite service area and in AK and HI. ©
277
MULTIMEDIA
2017 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and
all related marks and logos are trademarks
of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Media Hub – Playing iPod/USB/
MP3 Devices
There are many ways to play music from
iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle's sound system.
USB Port And Audio Jack (AUX)
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX/Audio Jack
278
Audio Jack (AUX)
USB Port
The AUX allows a portable device, such as an
MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into the
radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound system,
using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the
source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Connect your iPod or compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB
Memory sticks with audio files can also be
used. Then, audio from the device can be
played on the vehicles sound system while
providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• Press the MEDIA button, press “Select
Source” and then choose “AUX” source will
change the mode to auxiliary device if the
audio jack is connected, allowing the music
from your portable device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the portable device are
controlled using the device buttons. The
volume may be controlled using the radio or
portable device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
When connected, the iPod/compatible USB
device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to
the next or previous track, browse, and list
the contents.
The USB device battery charges when
plugged into the USB port (if supported by
the specific device).
• To route the USB/iPod cable out of the
center console, use the access cut out.
NOTE:
• When connecting your iPod device for the
first time, the system may take several
minutes to read your music, depending on
the number of files. For example, the system will take approximately five minutes for
every 1,000 songs loaded on the device.
Also during the reading process, the
Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process ensures the full use of
your iPod features and only happens the
first time it is connected. After the first
time, the reading process of your iPod will
take considerably less time unless changes
are made or new songs are added to the
play list.
• The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, Nano, Touch, and iPhone devices. The
USB port also supports playing music from
compatible external USB Mass Storage
Class memory devices. Some iPod software
versions may not fully support the USB port
features. Please visit Apple’s website for
iPod software updates.
S = Standard Equipment
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
N/A = Not Available
Uconnect Media
6.5NAV
Hub
(USB,
AUX
Ports)
S
Remote
USB Port
(Fully
Functional)
S
Remote
USB Port
(Charging
Only)
N/A
If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command,
your Bluetooth-equipped iPod devices, cell
phones or other media players, may also be
able to stream music to your vehicle's sound
system. Your connected device must be
Bluetooth-compatible, and paired with your
system (see Uconnect Phone for pairing instructions). You can access the music from
your connected Bluetooth device by pressing
the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
279
MULTIMEDIA
iPod/CD/AUX Buttons
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Shuffle Music Tracks
3 — Music Track Information
• The iPod/CD/AUX controls are accessed by
pressing the desired button on the touchscreen displayed on the side of the screen
and choosing between AUX, iPod or
Bluetooth.
280
4 — Songs Currently In Queue
5 — Browse Music
6 — Music Source
NOTE:
Uconnect will usually automatically switch to
the appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Press the NAV button to access the Navigation feature.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen from the Nav Main Menu.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
281
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
282
Find A Destination
View Map
View Information
Emergency Assistance
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Repeat Route Guidance Prompt
Detour Route
Stop Route
Navigation Settings
Finding Points Of Interest
Entering A Destination Address
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Point of Interest” button on
the touchscreen.
• From the main Navigation menu press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Address” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select a Category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Follow the on-screen prompts (country,
state/province, city, street) to enter the address and press the “Yes” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen and then press the “Spell
Name” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “Yes”
button on the touchscreen.
• Destination entry is not available while your
vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Command to enter an address
while moving. See Voice Command Tips for
more information.
Setting Your Home Location
• Press the NAV button to access the Navigation system and the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Go Home” button
on the touchscreen.
• To delete your Home location (or other
saved locations) so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen from the Main Navigation menu, then press the “Go Home”
button on the touchscreen, and in the Yes
screen press the “Options” button on the
touchscreen. In the Options menu press
Clear Home. Set a new Home location by
following the previous instructions.
Go Home
A Home location must be saved in the system.
• From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Go Home” button on the
touchscreen.
• Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit
icon could appear as you travel on major
roadways.
• You may enter your address directly, use
your current location as your home address,
or choose from recently found locations.
283
MULTIMEDIA
Navigation Map
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Distance To Next Turn
Next Turn Street
Estimated Time Of Arrival
Your Location
284
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Navigation Routing Options
Current Street Location
Navigation Main Menu
Zoom In/Out
Adding A Stop
Taking A Detour
To add a stop you must be navigating a route:
To take a detour you must be navigating a
route:
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device might not calculate a detour.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Voice
Recognition Quick Tips
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 6.5 NAV system.
• For more information, see your Uconnect
6.5 NAV Owner’s Manual Supplement.
285
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
286
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first press either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pressing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
287
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push For Voice Recognition (VR)
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
288
Push the VR button
say:
. After the beep,
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
289
MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
say:
. After the beep,
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system will provide you with a list of commands.
290
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
291
MULTIMEDIA
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest
Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play
genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod or
USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
292
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Media
Phone
U.S./Canadian residents can visit:
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.
• UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say one of the following commands…
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)
• Call John Smith
293
MULTIMEDIA
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John
Smith work.”
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone
294
Navigation (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say “Find nearest
coffee shop.”
295
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Uconnect Access — If Equipped (6.5 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access
services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will
NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) network connection.
296
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect
Access services in the next section of this
guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
push the MORE button on the faceplate and
then the “Apps” button on the touchscreen to
get started.
NOTE:
•
If your vehicle is not
connected to an operable 1X (voice/data)
or 3G (data) network,
the signal strength
bars on the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen will show a single bar and a prohibition symbol to indicate your vehicle is not
connected to an operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network.
• Uconnect Access is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska and
Hawaii. Vehicle is not connected to an
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
CALL
9 11
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/
Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle
Start**
Yelp Search
Remote Horn and
Lights
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance
Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
Text
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register
with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on the overhead
console.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the
touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the
details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps
above. Or, push the MORE button on the
faceplate then press the Apps button on the
touchscreen and select the Uconnect registration app to “Register By Web” and complete the process using your mobile device or
computer.
Why sign up for Uconnect Access? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Discover great, new places around you using Yelp.
• Dictate and send text messages by speaking out loud (all while keeping both hands
on the wheel!)
For further information
DriveUconnect.com.
please
visit
297
MULTIMEDIA
Mobile App (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and playing your favorite
music in your vehicle.
2. Open the app and enter your Mopar Owner
Connect account information.
NOTE:
Once you download the app to your compatible device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
Voice Texting (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your
message and provide a variety of options
to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if
you’re happy with your message, after the
beep, say “Send.”
TIP:
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
You must be registered with Uconnect Access
and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. (Not compatible with
iPhone.)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Send
message to John Smith.”
Mobile App
1. Download the Uconnect Access App from
the App Store or Google Play on your
device.
298
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send.
Wait for Uconnect to process your
message.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen
must be illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (Uconnect 6.5 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you
can use your voice to search for the most
popular places or things around you.
1. Push the VR button
say: Launch YELP.
. After the beep,
2. Once the YELP home screen appears on
the touchscreen, push the VR button
, then say: YELP search.
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the
beep, tell Uconnect the place or business
that you’d like Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can
reorganize the results by selecting either the
Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top
of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
299
MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Travel Link (Uconnect 6.5 NAV —
US Market Only)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 6.5 NAV system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
300
SiriusXM Travel Link
301
MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Getting Started
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
Ensure Siri is enabled On Your iPhone.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
302
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system.
Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in this guide
for a detailed pairing procedure.
Enable Siri
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select Settings On Your iPhone
Select General
Select Siri
Enable Siri
Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Phone Pick Up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE:
A push and release of the
button will
start normal embedded VR functions. The
push and hold, then release of the
button will start Siri functions.
303
MULTIMEDIA
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to
Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• "Play Rolling Stones"
• "Send text message to John"
• "Read text message from Sarah"
• "Take me to the nearest coffee shop"
NOTE:
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related
marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• DriveUconnect.com
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and
volume while facing straight ahead to
ensure your command is understood.
• U.S. residents call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
• Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
304
Uconnect
Access
Services
Support
1-855-792-4241.
Please
have
your
Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
SiriusXM Setup, System Information, Restore Default Settings, Clear Personal Data,
and Compass (Uconnect 5.0) through buttons on the touchscreen.
• For the Uconnect 5.0 system, push the
button on the faceplate, then
More
button on the
press the “Settings”
touchscreen. For the Uconnect 6.5 system,
button located on
push the Settings
the right side of the display. When making a
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and
release the preferred setting until the selection is highlighted showing that setting has
been selected. Depending on the vehicles
options, the following feature settings
could be available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Display
Units
Voice
Clock
Safety & Driving Assistance
Lights
Doors & Locks
Engine Off Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Audio
Phone/Bluetooth
SiriusXM Setup
System Information
Restore Default Settings
Clear Personal Data
Compass (Uconnect 5.0)
For further information, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual on
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals.
305
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Call/Redial/Hold
Mobile Phone Signal Strength
Currently Paired Mobile Phone
Mobile Phone Battery Life
Mute Microphone
Transfer To/From Uconnect System
306
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains 911)
12 — End Call
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Favorite Contacts
Mobile Phone Battery Life
Currently Paired Mobile Phone
Mobile Phone Signal Strength
Mute Microphone
Transfer To/From Uconnect System
Conference Call*
Manage Paired Mobile Phones
Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains 911)
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile and a compatible phone)
307
MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
• For Uconnect Customer Care: U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400, Canadian Residents
visit
UconnectPhone.com
or
call,
1-800-465-2001
(English)
or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
308
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Radio 3.0:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the
faceplate.
“Phone”
button
on
the
• If there is no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
NOTE:
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you
first must determine if your mobile phone
and software are compatible with the
Uconnect
system.
Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
• Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
• Select Bluetooth and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
5. If No is selected, and you still would like
to pair a mobile phone, press the “Settings” button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
• Select “Paired Phones” then press the
“Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is
connecting.
within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone
and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be
connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio
device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
NOTE:
Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV:
Uconnect 5.0:
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will
take precedence over other paired phones
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Uconnect 5.0
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
309
MULTIMEDIA
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
NOTE:
Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
310
When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect
Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
Uconnect Device
• To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
Pairing Request
Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth
pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
311
MULTIMEDIA
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com for additional
information on mobile phone pairing and for
a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen to mute and unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone you
will be asked if you want to download your
phonebook. Phonebook contacts are updated
each time that the phone is connected. If
your phone book entries do not appear, check
the settings on your phone. Some phones
require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown at the top of the main phone screen.
312
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
button on the
that you need, push the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone
, then say a command for exbutton
ample - "Help."
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect is different than the audio
system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect Phone
button
on the steering wheel and say
"help." Press the display or press either the
Phone
or VR
button and say "cancel" to cancel the help session.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
NOTE:
Voice texting reply and voice texting features
require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP). iPhone, and some other smartphones,
may not entirely support Bluetooth MAP. Visit
UconnectPhone.com for the latest system
and device compatibility.
• On some mobile phones, to make the SMS
voice reading function available, the SMS
notification option on phone must be enabled. This option is usually in the
Bluetooth connections menu for a device
registered as “Uconnect.” After enabling
this function on the device, it must be
disconnected and reconnected with the
Uconnect system in order to make it effective
• Due to the extremely large number of mobile phone manufacturers, your mobile device may not be listed. For further assistance, contact Uconnect Customer Care @
1-877-855-8400 for U.S. residents or,
1-800-465-2001
(English)
/
1-800-387-9983 (French) for Canadian
residents.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to your over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How:
1. Push the Uconnect Phone button
and wait for the beep, then say
“reply.” Uconnect will give the following
prompt: “Please say the message you
would like to send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the
pre-defined messages. (If you are not
sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will
then read the pre-defined messages
allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in trafYes.
See you later.
fic.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Where are
I will be <5,
Okay.
you?
10,
Are you there 15,...etc.>*
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I’m on my
way.
I’m lost.
I need directions.
Can’t talk
right now.
See you in
<5, 10,
15,...etc.>*
of minutes.
Thanks.
*Use only the numbers listed (in increments
of five up to 60 minutes) or the system will
not transpose the message.
313
MULTIMEDIA
Want to dictate a personal message?
• You must first register with Uconnect Access (U.S. residents only) to take advantage
of a new, cloud-based Voice Texting service,
an enhancement to Voice Text Reply
(Uconnect 6.5NAV systems ONLY).
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions.
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications
that may be operating (refer to mobile
314
phone manufacturer’s instructions), and
follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting)
Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System.”
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 5.0 system phonebook.
Text messaging won’t work:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“connect to your messages” request on
your mobile phone.
• Verify that your mobile phone has the
Bluetooth feature (Message Access
Profile).
Can’t make a conference call:
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable HandsFree Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 6.5 NAV system phonebook.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . .316
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . .316
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . .316
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .316
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . .318
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . .316
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .317
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .317
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . .317
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .318
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .319
315
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure
to have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue
to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems
or the specific work you want done. If you've
had an accident or work done that is not on
your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must
have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss the situation with the service advisor
and list the items in order of priority. At many
316
authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
317
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
318
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in
order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE.,
West
Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
You can also purchase a copy by calling
1-877-426-5337
(U.S.)
or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio
Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038
(U.S.)
or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted.
NOTE:
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left menu.
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”, then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
319
320
INDEX
Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 245
Access, Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . .117
Enhanced Accident Response . . . .192
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . .192
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . .120
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .117
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .123
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .115
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 136
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .51
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . .50
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . .16, 72, 79
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .16
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . .233
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .84
Anti-Lock Warning Light. . . . . .74, 75, 78
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . .16
Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . .256
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .53
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .50
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .147, 203
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .203
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Auto Up Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . .54
Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 204
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . .73
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .93
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . .85
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . .34
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . .136
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . .177, 206
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
321
INDEX
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .135
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .133
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . .125
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . .130
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Older Children And Child Restraints .126
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
322
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 79
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . .32
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . .37
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . .137
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . .32
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . .190
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . .23, 24
E-85 Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . .
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM).
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.232
.141
.141
. .85
. .84
. .90
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . .86
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .170
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 206
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Emission Control System Maintenance . .80
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . .201
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .234
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .136
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .231
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .192
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 138
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . .34, 79, 138
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .234
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .93, 96
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .188
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . .231, 234
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override
General Information . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.231
.145
.188
. .99
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . .306
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . .170
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .32
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .33
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.33
.28
.28
.32
.91
.91
.85
.61
.61
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Instrument Cluster . . . . . .72, 73, 75, 79
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . .69
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . .227
Interior And Instrument Lights . . . . . . .34
Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . .226
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . .35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
In Vehicle Features
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Inverter, Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
323
INDEX
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . .306
Jacking Instructions
Jack Location . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
.177,
. . . .
. . . .179
. . . .177
179, 206
. . . .185
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . .
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . .
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . .
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry Programming . . . .
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock From The Driver's Side .
Unlock From The Passenger Side
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.16
.16
.19
.13
.19
.19
.19
.19
.19
.19
.19
.19
.19
.13
.14
.13
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . .34
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 63
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .37
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 136
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .33
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .90
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 79
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .32
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . .73
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .170
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . .33
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . .32
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .91
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .76
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .71
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 100
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . .34, 79, 138
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 79
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . .100
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . .204
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .194
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 80
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . .144, 203
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .203
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . .202
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . .23
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . .23
Mirrors
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . .100
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .231, 234
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .72
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . .
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . .
Outlet
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . .
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual)
. . . .79
. . . .79
Purchase Apps
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . .243
. . . .64
. . .187
. . .319
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Radio
Presets . . . . . . . . . . .252, 256, 274
Radio 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .14
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .256
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . .36
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .155
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . .
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . .
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placard, Tire And Loading Information
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . .
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . .
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.141
.155
.135
.306
.306
.211
.
.
.
.
.18
.65
.64
.53
. .25
. .25
. .25
.111
.178
.112
325
INDEX
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . .15
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . .318
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . .136
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . .138
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . .318
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . .206
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .194
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .112
Energy Management Feature . . . . .112
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . .109
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .108
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . .110
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .111
326
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . .112
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .107
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .226
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 136
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . .110
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Front Seat . . . . . . . . .107, 108, 109
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . .109
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . .110
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 25
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24, 25
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . .23, 24
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 72
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . .234
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . .14
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Shifting
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .144
Shift Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . .34, 79, 138
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .222
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 220
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .153
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 140
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Starting And Operating. . . . . . . . . . .140
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . .
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .30
. .30
. .30
.240
. .51
.188
. .115
. . .86
. . .15
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .30
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .50
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 313
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .211
Tire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .138, 214, 219, 223
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . .217
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 206
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
General Information . . . . . . .214, 219
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .215
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 206
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .100
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .76
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 214
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 220
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .216
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .206
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .191
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . .86
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 203
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . .216
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 79
Uconnect
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241, 245
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Maintaining Your Account . . . . . . .245
Using Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Uconnect 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .254, 256
Uconnect Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . .245
Purchase Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Uconnect Voice Command . .260, 285, 312
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . .223
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . .110
327
INDEX
Using Access
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) .16
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Voice Command . . . . . . . .260, 285, 312
Voice Recognition
System (VR). . . . . . . . .260, 285, 312
328
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .170
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . .220
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . . . .220
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 61
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Defroster . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Wiper Blade Replacement .
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .53
.137
.204
.204
. .35
. .36
.190
If you are the first registered retail
owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy
of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect Manuals or Warranty
Booklets by calling 1-877-426-5337
(U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility
is the safe operation of the vehicle.
Driving while distracted can result
in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in a collision and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends
that the driver use extreme caution
when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off
the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such
as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous
and could lead to a serious collision.
Texting while driving is also
dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to
devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
Important:
This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the
important features of your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals and Warranty Booklets can be
found on your DVD (if applicable) or by visiting the website
on the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find
it useful. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by
visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can
purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
This guide has been prepared to help you
get quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
However, it is not a substitute for your
Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions,
maintenance procedures and important
safety messages, please consult your
Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the
back cover of your user guide and
other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide
may apply to your vehicle. For
additional information on accessories
to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol:
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below
the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less
sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
17BU-926-AA
Renegade
Fourth Edition Rev 1
User Guide
Whether it’s providing
information about specific
product features, taking a
tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident,
or scheduling your next appointment,
we know you’ll find the app an
important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the
app, select your make and model and
enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store or Google
Play and enter the search keyword
“JEEP” (U.S. market only).
jeep.com /en /owners provides
special offers tailored to your
needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just
create an account and check
back often.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the
Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet by visiting:
www.jeep.com/en/owners/manuals or
www.jeep.com/en/warranty (U.S.);
www.owners.mopar.ca/en (Canada).
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2 01 7 RE N EG A D E U S E R G U I D E
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising